Home

2015 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner`s Manual

1. Memory Position Recall 219 Multifunction Lever llle 229 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Turn 5ipnals ced erroe me PETS OS 229 oeat Only scs esee purple eee Sina d 219 a E e 230 E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 221 High Low Beam Switch B LIGHIS i usesrtet seed saa hie Res 223 Flash To Pass LLL Hee OME eper ea pee bacs pe Battery Protection llle 230 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 224 E WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS 231 ur I ME epee Intermittent Wiper System 232 a Petey Ree sene odd Windshield Wiper Operation 232 DUCI cae eee 22 n Windshield Washers ise 232 MEM ee I Mist Feature cesses 232 Frons Fog Tights H BMPR sss stu ini Rear Wiper And Washer o iuu 233 Dimmer Controls 00006 226 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 233 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN 235 ll HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED 236 ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 4er Rey RE xe ERI ea 237 To Ac vale ases sheep re RE saws 238 To Set A Desired Speed 0 0 238 To Deactivate ead ce ee Re es 239 To Resume Speed isse cs em 239 To Vary The Speed Setting 239 To Accelerate For Passing 240 E PARKSENSE REAR PA
2. General Information 432 CLIMATE CONTROLS 00004 432 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System It Equipped essere RR 432 Rear Manual Climate Control If Equipped 437 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped eoe aes eed 440 Operating TIps ies ses cane eb RR ERG 451 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Vents 5 Upper Glove Compartment 9 Storage Bin 13 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Lower Glove Compartment 10 Cup Holders 14 Dimmer Switch 3 Shift Lever 7 Climate Controls 11 Switch Bank 15 Headlight Switch 4 Radio 8 DVD If Equipped 12 Ignition Switch 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 040340441 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 040335015 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 2 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 3 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on This indicator will illuminate when the park zDO lights or headlights are turned on 4 Turn Signal Indicato
3. 0226004403 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction poten tial provided by the seat belts and body structure The SABICs deploy downward covering the side win dows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs The trim covering above the side win dows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstruc tions Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs In order for the SABICS to work as intended do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof Do not add
4. arning Display UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status Park Assist System On 032737807 Park Assist System OFF 032839247 Park Assist System ON 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous 1 OOK ITRIC WJM Yii WU Ob ject Detected 032839260 Slow Tone Fast Tone 032839249 Continuous Tone 032839248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING ALERTS Reduced Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE P
5. 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE Crossbars are error proofed and cannot be deployed or stowed in the incorrect positions L e To help control wind noise stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use Deploying The Crossbars To deploy the crossbars completely loosen the thumb 037634933 screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side Loosening Crossbars CAUTION Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle Bend the crossbar supports at each end taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint Slide the thumb screw down 037634934 Stowed Position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 Deployed Position 037634935 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Then position the crossbars across the roof Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align with the directional arrows on the side rails Set the crossbars into the deployed positions NOTE The crossbars are identical and can be placed in any two of the three deploy positions 037634932 037634931 Crossbar To Side Rail Installation Deploy Positions Choose Two Of Three Once the crossbars are set into position tighten the
6. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633 Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter Continued CAUTION Continued shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifica tions Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additi
7. Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 19 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 20 Temperature Gaug
8. NOTE The switches will not operate if the driver has activated the Power Window Lockout 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 021934170 Sliding Door Power Window Switch NOTE The sliding door windows do not fully open stopping several inches above the window sill Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting SLIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the sliding door The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back Rocking the handle back wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 To keep your door operating properly observe the fol lowing guidelines e Always open the door smoothly Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open ing the door This is very important when your vehicle is parked on a
9. WARNING e Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended Do not allow children to have access to the second row seat storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke e In a collision serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285 CAUTION The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever As a security measure the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha nism Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow in the dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Coat Hooks Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and th
10. silos 42 Battery PDC 618 Jump Starting 22 s dera ey x ew E 594 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 28 Saving Feature Protection 230 Belts Seat essa 9 oe HAAS OSEE S 122 Body Mechanism Lubrication 622 B Pillar Location 2 lees 501 Brake Assist System 0 0 0 000000 486 Brake Control System Electronic 482 Brake Fluid uet er Rey 3s Brake System s coca eee Anti Lock ABS isses E Re Fluid Check 5 se e Parking ers ceste rp te do de id Warning Light ee eiae em e Brake Transmission Interlock 682 INDEX M Bulb Replacement sae 4 0 04 ye ced 652 Bulbs Light endure fue eiue 124 Calibration Compass 0 0000005 340 Camera Reate he ewe ER E En 250 Capacities Fluid ius ede doe eren ee ded 656 Caps Filler F u lzco saga wa eR nece Ya ERO RE Ped 539 Powet 5teering cueste a eg 478 Radiator Coolant Pressure 628 Carbon Monoxide Warning 121 Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier soss 2e e RR E 295 Cargo Vehicle Loading lille 286 Car Washes 4iuwzs de RR RR ER anes 635 Cellular Phone 2 000 ce eee eee 431 Center High Mounted Stop Light 655 Certification Label 2 0 00 00 0000 cee eens 541 Chains Tire i i sad erac REOR RR ue 519 Changing A Plat Trees sse ARR aa 575 Chart Tire Sizing Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator
11. to switch to Bluetooth Streaming mode Memo to switch to the memo recorder System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e e e Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands e Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 e e e e e Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Mode To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the follo
12. Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Veh
13. EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 497 EXAMPLE R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits 498 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss EXAMPLE Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforc
14. If Equipped This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror In Reverse If Equipped When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in a reverse gear the driver s side mirror will tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To make your selection push and release the SELECT butto
15. Life Of Tite 2 02 ie bem emm hs 516 Materials Added To Fuel 533 Replacement Tires 00000 517 Fuel System Cautions lille 533 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 519 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 534 E TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 520 MI FLEXIBLE FUEL IF EQUIPPED iss s 535 E TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 521 E 85 General Information 535 base System i i deed pin Ge e E ege dcs 524 Ethanol Fuel E 85 2 0 200040 536 Premium System If Equipped 526 Fuel Requirements B FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2224 0 203 40 24 96 530 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles 36LEngine e eee 530 E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 537 Reformulated Gasoline 531 ul E es Gasoline Oxygenate Blends esses 531 Cruising Range scs ecce Lr 538 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 532 Replacement Parts 000056 538 MMT In Gasoline concn bte eco 532 Maintenance 0 pepin eee eee 538 458 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ADDING FUEL xx caus ees e Ree 539 Common Towing Definitions 544 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap lisse 539 Towing Dp serere iuni eee ee 556 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 540 I RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND B VEHICLE LOADING 44 054 ok Rer 541 TAD TORE DME ENG wdtggdblidandece tian 99d Vehicle Certific
16. for further informa tion If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer as soon as possible VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar If seats are removed for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B Pillar or the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 542 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels s
17. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engin
18. Playing MP3 Elles isses semen 367 Uconnect phone 159 Umbrella Holder llle 282 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 677 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 376 Universal Transmitter lesse 257 Unleaded Gasoline llle 530 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 70 Upholstery Care sor deigis aani a Ean asi aa 638 Vanity Mirrors 1 ee 136 Variance COmp ss ue stecken x RR e 341 Vehicle Certification Label 00 541 Vehicle Identification Number VIN en INDEX 699 Vehicle Loading s es esga Panga wend kan de 502 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicl Storages iu dde bp Ee sie Pidas 451 Viscosity Engine Qil cres ierat awa eee 614 Voice Command Commands ns cune Pune a Pop t eR RR ania 179 System Operation see sisesed ees e 177 Voice Training 6 ee 183 Voice Recognition System VR 00 177 Warning Flasher Hazard llle 561 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 310 Warnings and Cautions lisse esses 6 Warranty Information oeg eee e e 674 Washer Adding Fluid i teach ester tete s 623 Washing Vehicle ies RR Rem 635 Water Driving Through casga anaa adia and 476 Wind Buffet ng resce Pied ek ed RR Ree 44 Window Fogging l seeeeeeee 452 WIndOWS uos sae tte ue ee eed e deae ede 39 Power iiu ue pipa REUS ES de went eee eo 40 Rear Vents 23 5 4 4 42 boa 4 454248
19. The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance WARNING e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that
20. follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while you push and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash s
21. indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed 6 Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate push the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until t
22. trolled by the ignition switch Each of these outlets can support 160 Watts 13 Amps Do not exceed 160 Watts 13 Amps for each of these outlets The power outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source The power outlet located on the lower instrument panel is powered directly from the battery Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736476 Power Outlet Fuses 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat Opt or with Console Rear 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with Console Front 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or with Console Center 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficientl
23. 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en gaged even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle the RKE transmitter the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door The power sliding side door will operate from the switches located on the B pillar trim panel just in front of the power sliding door regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position To avoid unin tentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats push the OFF Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console next to the driver ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING NOTE After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened from the outside door handle or the switches located on the B Pillar trim panel just in front of the power The power sliding side door switches will not open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks power sliding doors if the
24. 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 472 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE For example if you shift the transmission into 4 fourth gear the transmission will not shift above fourth gear except to prevent engine overspeed but will shift through the lower gears nor mally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the left will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right will change the top available gear To exit ERS mode simply hold th
25. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pushing the SCAN button
26. Headlamps With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Intermittent Wiper Options If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When the system is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle d
27. Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion Windshield Washers To use the Washer push on the end of the lever to the second detent and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected If the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate several wipe cycles then turn off Mist Feature Press the end of the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent and release for a single wiping cycle NOTE T
28. Knee Air Bag Advanced Front Air Bag Features 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster Supplemental Driver Knee Air i Bag The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You
29. Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect Phone e Push the Voice Command Sve button Following the beep say Mute To un mute the Uconnect Phone e Push the Voice Command Sve button Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa push the Voice Com mand VR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconn
30. Replace the battery compartment cover Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to do so for themselves If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position and that the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired 406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME channel If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones 010107716 VES Headphones 3 Channel Selection Switch 4 Power Indicator 1 Volume Control 2 Power Button Blu ray Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to do so for themselves es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407 If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position and that the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel If audio
31. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft 3 8 m The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft 3 m beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with fore
32. Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1 000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Either the mobile phone s phonebook or the mobile phone s SIM card phonebook is downloaded This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Add Names To Your Uconnect amp Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook
33. and the gear selected is displayed For further informa tion on ERS refer to Starting And Operating e Electronic Speed Control Ready e This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ready For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET Y This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Loose Gascap Indicator E If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 If the message continues to appear for more than three days after tightening the gas cap have the vehicle serviced by an authorized service center immediately e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator eee INI i EVIC Red Telltale Light
34. days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may do the following e Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Bulb Number Center amp Rear Dome Lamp 578 Center amp Rear Reading Lamps 578 Front Door Courtesy Lamp 578 Front Header Reading Lamps If Equipped 578 Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74 Liftgate Lamp s 578 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651 Bulb Number Overhead Console Reading Lamps PC579 Removable Console Lamp If Equipped 194 Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Headlamp HILL Fog Lamp If Equipped PSX24W Front Side Marker Park Turn Signal 3757A or PY27 7W Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Backup Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer 3157 License 168
35. display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST button on the touch screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel 1 press the 2 button on the touchscreen and choose an audio source To exit press the back arrow button at the top left of the left screen Dual Video Screen NOTE Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Video Entertainment System VES e The Remote Control The Touchscreen Radio If Equipped Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio NOTE Headunit DVD player does not play Blu ray Discs 1 Push the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD button on the radio faceplate Touchscreen 2 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 3 To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen gers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 4 To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Using The Remote Control NOTE 1 Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control e Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown 2 While looking at Screen 1 or 2 highlight DISC by onthe JI E SICIP COE hostcet
36. e DivX Home Theater Profile 3 0 requires Maximum resolution 720 x 480 30fps or 720 x 576 25fps Minimum resolution 16 x 16 Maximum frame rate for progressive source 30 frames per second Maximum field rate for interlaced source 60 fields per second To change the current chapter use the remote control s or Blu Ray Player s Fast Forward button to ad vance to the next chapter or the Fast Rewind button to return to the start of the current or previous chapter DVD Blu ray BD Region Codes The DVD player Blu ray Player and many DVD Blu ray Discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD Blu ray Disc does not match the region code for the player the disc will stop playing and a warning will be displayed DVD Audio Support When a DVD Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player the DVD Audio title on the disc is played by default most DVD Audio discs also have a Video title but the Video title is ignored All multi channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels which may result in a lowered apparent volume level If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode Recorded Discs The DVD player will play CD R and CD RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format or as a CD ROM containing MP3 WMA or
37. ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 inch 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio CAUTION Continued e Dual media disc types
38. either pushing Up Down Left Right buttons or by Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button then push on the right side of the screen ENTER OK EE Select Mode 2 ITI STE AM DISC MUERE 13 5 reset 10 I Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls FM AUX WEATHER 1 Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate SAT Ves DISC 2 Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to HDD Ves AUX1 Bs Weather Channel display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is e The VES will retain the last setting when turned off Tongaa har Channel displayed press the HIDE LIST button on the touch ow Odean Ma Mother Nature screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen 12 00 Enter to Select 044874307 Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 NOTE To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO MEDIA button on the radio faceplate then press the DISC tab button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO button on the touchscreen DVD Video Menu FER My Files DVD Setup Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp mu Display Setting Screen Saver Default View 2 System Setup Play Pause Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not available in all states provinces If available the ve hicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with an automatic trans mission In vehicles with a manual
39. en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED where it can be raised on a lift WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by Turn the two cover latches to release th
40. hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold 1 Push and hold the Phone w button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling push the Voice Command VevRbutton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established push and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indi cating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Termination To end a call in progress 1 Momentarily push the Phone button e Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent 2 To bring the call back from hold push and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial Push the Phone w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect amp Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is th
41. is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued 494 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another ve hicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the touch screen radio Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TIRE SAFETY INFO
42. one side is a DVD the ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION EJECT Button Ejecting A CD e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs Push the EJECT button to eject the CD only The use of other sized discs may damage the a CD player mechanism other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on Continued i convertible or soft top models if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 SEEK Button Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling throug
43. the seat 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head restraint ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 4 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click Sit back in seat Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt 9 To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini buckle The seat belt will auto matically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position WARNING e If the mini latch
44. thumb screws completely 037634936 Tightening Crossbar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299 Stowing The Crossbars Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars again taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint Crossbars are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest Once the crossbars are stowed tighten the thumb screws completely NOTE Load should always be secured to crossbars first with rail tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed Tie loops are intended as supplemen tary tie down points only Do not use ratcheting mecha nisms with the tie loops 300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten thumb screws as necessary To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ib 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed Rail Tie Loops The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface 037635205 Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301 CAUTION Continued WARNING Long l
45. to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will dis
46. wiper speed is in the low or high position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON and the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the transmis sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote St
47. 0 llle Brake System less 630 O Automatic Transmission 633 606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care And Protection From COOS Oaa hare ees terree Sheed Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders i FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses B VEHICLE STORAGE s sxos0es eyes ade ded E REPLACEMENT BULBS ll BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 641 642 642 650 650 E FLUID CAPACITIES E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS 657 bog Eamips ace iu cc exa Sx aer ed 653 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Backup Lamps 00 0000 caus 654 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 655 License Lamp s vaca dean eae s eR 655 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 074410816 1 Air Filter 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Battery 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ses ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control sy
48. 05254 Remote Control Controls And Indicators 1 Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off To hear audio while the screen is closed push the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pushed the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily Light Turns the remote control backlighting on or off The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five seconds Channel Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 left side of the screen When the selector switch is in the Channel 2 position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 right side of the screen 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL E 5 gt gt In radio modes push to seek the next tunable station In disc modes push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu V Prev In radio modes push to select to the previous station In disc modes push to advance to the start of the current or previous audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu POP UP MENU push to return to the main menu of a DVD disc or select playback mode
49. 257 Rear Console Halo Lighting The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base This feature provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch Refer to Lights Halo Lights If Equipped in Understanding the Features Of Your Vehicle for further information GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 034033576 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the H
50. 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pushing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available ee UNDERSTA
51. 652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or 2 Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector then glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not depress the tab and remove the connector from the approved and should not be used for replacement bulb BULB REPLACEMENT 3 Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the headlamp housing NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric 4 Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked conditions change to allow the condensation to change into the headlamp housing back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process CAUTION Headlamps Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the housi bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the ESSET bulb with rubbing alcohol 1 Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp 5 Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red lock tab forward ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653 Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 1 From behind the bumper fascia or the access panel on the air dam squeeze the two tabs on the side of the 1 Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp bulb socket and pull straight out from the fog lamp housing 2 Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the CAUTION headlamp housing then pull the bu
52. AAC Blu ray Disc 418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Player only files The player will also play DVD Video content recorded to a DVD R or DVD RW disc DVD ROM discs either pressed or recorded are not sup ported If you record a disc using a personal computer there may be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play some or the entire disc even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players To help avoid playback problems use the following guide lines when recording discs Open sessions are ignored Only sessions that are closed are playable For multi session CDs that contain only multiple CD Audio sessions the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique For CD Data or CD ROM discs always use the ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2 Joliet or Romeo format Other formats such as HFS or others are not sup ported e Blu ray Disc Player can extend 2 000 files and 255 folders The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD R and CD RW disc Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video TS portion of the disc Mixed disc which contains DivX will be priority played on Blu ray Disc Player If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in the DVD player check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUM
53. After DVD Player Language Menu 422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME selecting the digit push the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits e When the entire four digit code is entered push the remote control s ENTER OK button If the language code is not valid the numbers all change back to s If the digits are visible after this step then the lan guage code is valid Here is an abbreviated list of language codes For more language codes please contact the dealer where the vehicle was purchased Language Code Language Code Dutch 2311 French 1517 German 1304 Italian 1819 Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418 Rating And Password Setup The Rating and Password settings work together to control the types of DVDs that your family watches Most DVD Video discs have a rating from 1 to 8 assigned to them where lower numbers are designated for all audi ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences When a DVD Video disc is loaded its rating is compared to the setting in the DVD player If the rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the player a Password screen is displayed In order to watch the disc the rear passen ger must enter the correct password using the password entry method described below To play all discs without requiring a password set the DVD player s rating to Lev
54. Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pushing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio This radio i
55. Channel 2 could be used for audio If watching a video on Screen 2 third row then Channel 1 could be used for audio Using The Remote Control 1 Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and the Select Mode Screen will display unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen 2 While looking at the video screen either press Up Down Left Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly press the SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen L1 SAT WEATHER 2 ExX3da 4u AM DISC FM ND SAT Ves DISC HDD Ves AUX1 Ves AUX2 s amp MUTE Preset 10 WEATHER Fi The Weather Channel h The Weather Channel T PA Mother Nature 00 00 Enter to Select Select FM Mode On The VES Screen Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls 1 Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate 2 Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 displayed press the HIDE LIST button on the touch screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen DVD Video Menu FER My Files DVD Setup Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp am Display Setting F Screen TER Saver ES Default i View Picture we View System Setup Play Pause EM Audio Control ae View 010107721 Rear VES Button
56. Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641 Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately 30 minutes After 30 minutes pull the Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting liner from the water and dip it back into the water about at one edge to ease removal six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe or you may follow with a clean soft cloth the cleaning procedure below Removal Cleaning Installation Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the corresponding openings in the drawer 642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUSES WARNING Continued WARNING e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap propriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other The Totally Integrated
57. I ll be late Are you there yet Where are we meet ing Can this wait Bye for now When can we meet Send number to call Start without me ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages 1 Push the Phone button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Entries Listed one 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Loc
58. Impact Bolsters Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags e Supplemental Knee Air Bags e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Seat Belt Pretenioners e Seat Belt Buckle Switch e Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 022635264 12 years or younger including a child in a rear Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster facing child restraint Locations e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags with a rear seat 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster Supplemental Passenger
59. Light 315 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 120 Checks Safety v Cieeoc ex ci eh Rr S bane tes 120 Child Restraint us dua une e ERU S aer ure des 95 Child Restraints Booster Seats Genter Seat LATCH Eier cel WER ee D 108 Child Restraints 2 0 0 00 eee 95 Child Seat Installation 0 4 112 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 110 Infants And Child Restraints 98 Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 109 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Bel section ain oa Sata aol genase EE he uealieet 111 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 103 Older Children And Child Restraints 98 Seating Positions lt 4 aria alas paces d Rane 102 en INDEX 683 Using The Top Tether Anchorage 116 Child Safety Locks wis wade o h ye arn ed 49 Clean Air Gasoline cc 00 coeG ede em n 531 Climate Control sx inen gee Son rd ne md 432 Clocks ue gehe ey RES RE ee 351 Coat Hooks cue eee RI ere Re URP 286 Coin Holder ailes e Re bg em 287 Cold Weather Operation 0 0 460 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 431 Compact Spare Tire llle eee 513 Compass 240 pa deg den des eub e ed dees Y don 340 Compass Calibration llle 340 Compass Variance es 341 Computer Tmp aveler esser siega epia 337 Connector UCM ease bi SERRE wees oa 376 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 376 Cons
60. Loading in this section 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and T ine th i loadi iti f E o determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 504 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Th
61. MPEGLA COM Patents Cinavia Notice This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially produced film and videos and their soundtracks When a prohib ited use of an unauthorized copy is detected a message will be displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at http www cinavia com To request addi tional information about Cinavia by mail send a postcard with your mailing address to Cinavia Con sumer Information Center P O Box 86851 San Diego CA 92138 USA This product incorporates proprietary technology under license from Verance Corporation and is protected by U S Patent 7 369 677 and other U S and worldwide patents issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such tech nology Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation Copyright 2004 2010 Verance Corporation All rights reserved by Verance Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited 428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e This product incorporates copyright protection tech nology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright pro tection technology must be authorized by Macrovi sion and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Rev
62. Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire 514 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than
63. ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the
64. Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Emergency Key Removal 020207436 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021334198 Inserting Key Into Transmitter Case Slot 021334199 Separating Transmitter Case 3 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal halves together distance check for these two conditions General Information 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and IDE batery as a minim DCU
65. Power Module is located in the material Failure to use proper fuses may result in engine compartment near the battery Refer to the appli cable Engine Compartment illustration in this section This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed or embossed on the inside of the cover bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer serious personal injury fire and or property dam age Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643 CAUTION e When installing the Totally Integrated Power Mod ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If Totally Integrated Power Module a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 072710719 The numbers insid
66. SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 676 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and t
67. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight way power seats for the driver and front passenger The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat The switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback 1 Seat Switch Driver Power Seat Switch 2 Seatback Switch 030905108 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement
68. Selection menu appears on screen use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi gate to the available modes and push the OK button to select the new mode 5 To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu push the BACK button on the remote control Replacing The Headphone Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation To replace the batteries 1 Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones and then slide the battery cover downward 2 Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown 3 Replace the battery compartment cover Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser you or your of this particular Unwired Technology LLC Unwired wire less headphone Product The warranty is not transfer able How Long Does The Coverage Last This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product What Does This Warranty Cover Except as specified below this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials What Does This Warranty Not Cover This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired Foam earpieces which will wear over time through normal use are specifically not covered replace ment foam is available for a
69. Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center 5 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired 6 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle 3 Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit WHEEL AND TI
70. Syste s cve seror 00 002 nivaa 20 Back Up tic sa es ania tee ex baw ee eni Key Replacement llle 16 Battery Saver es ex RES SOR quer ds Keys ius ioobR ROI eG db dad og dein ane dear uds 12 Brake Assist Warning llle Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 15 Brake Warning i scesa saprene t n aene E i Bulb Replacement 00 0000 Lane Change Assists ace cea esee soca are 230 Center Mounted Stop 205 Lap Shoulder Belts 25 e mmm e 59 Daytime Running 45 2e ed Latches 9 aee esee npe ER ea RUE eae 124 Dimmer Switch Headlight 690 INDEX MM Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 489 Engine Temperature Warning 322 EXtetlOP 4 4 5 cue bg Re e eh epe be des 124 FOS carece Re Re er Ea ee ee niri oa 226 Hazard Warning Flasher liess 561 Headlighis ees sper e dere epe 652 Headlights On Reminder 6 225 High Beam Indicator 00000 310 High Beam Low Beam Select 230 Illuminated Entry 0000000000 19 ENOT cete ete os Game ed ete s es 226 License 222220 hera e PR ad 655 Lights On Reminder sess 225 Low Fuel ai ek RR mea 321 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 315 Oil Pressure i a sus s hs 322 Datk cess RS none eas eo Ro actae d 653 PASSING uar ew ced ne oe RR Re orata 230 Reading Rear Servicing 3 44e p em awaa heas a 654 Rear Tail Lamps 42436 eet
71. TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585 0606014793 mm 586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 6 in 150 mm 0605015378 060540390 Rear Jack Engaged Front Jack Locations Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body and is located 6 in 150 mm from door edge WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587 WARNING Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift 3 Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location Do not raise the vehicle until you Front Jack Engaged are sure the jack is securely engaged NOTE In some situations the jack may need to be 4 placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under the vehicle 0605015377 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the compact spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 588 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and h
72. VEHICLE M e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re straint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Second Row Quad Seats To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Head Restraints Third Row The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further informat
73. While sitting in the seat pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Recline To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched 030935536 Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fold Flat Easy Entry To fold the seat lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into position and push the seatback forward until it rest
74. a lift 060505162 Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued Continued 584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on WARNING Continued Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle careful of motor traffic To assure that compact spare tires flat or inflated NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of are securely stowed compact spares must be Tires General Information for information about the stowed with the valve stem facing the ground compact spare tire its use and operation AI x lt lt Jack Warning Label 1 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 2 There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body Jack Locations CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated Rear jack locations are between a pair of down facing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body Rear Jacking Locations WHAT
75. an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason The SABICs and SABs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC de termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the Side Air Bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from inflating Side Air Bags To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Childr
76. and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting and Operating for further information Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599 CAUTION WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be mission shifting occurring moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to tempo
77. and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS morwenn VE Set the mode control to 72 vehicle interior is very s on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort e OO SAY Cool amp Humid conditions e 06 Set the mode control to d and tum on 6 6 46 to keep windows clear e A Set the mode control to the position If windshield ther Cold Weathe fogging starts to occur move the control towards the We position 8000cb71 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS ll STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission NormalStarting lesse Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C If The Engine Fails To Start After Starting E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Key Ignition Park Interlock Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Fuel Economy ECON Mode Six Speed Automatic Transmission Gear Ranges DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Traction O Flowing Rising Water DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water 464 456 STARTIN
78. and mini buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occu pant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision Continued 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e When reattaching the mini latch and mini buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding proce dure to detach the mini latch and mini buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the mini latch and mini buckle Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that
79. automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or
80. bag material may sometimes cause abrasions Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags ployed If you are involved in another collision the air deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric bags will not be in place to protect you tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller particles The particles are a normal by product of the System serviced as well process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the NOTE skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in authorized
81. be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors e Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals e Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle e Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault is present In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists Vehicles With Compact Spare The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 529 e LOW TIRE
82. button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed w
83. by repeating the previous procedure Power Sliding Side Door Power Switch To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the second row sliding door switches and handles may be overridden by pushing the OFF side of the Power Switch located in the front overhead con sole When the power sliding door power switch is in the OFF position the power sliding side door may not be opened or closed by pushing the switch located on the B pillar trim panel just in front of the sliding door or activating the inside power sliding door handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock 022002253 1 Open the sliding side door Overhead C le P Sliding D P Switch g Mia der EM MU CEA bL LL a 2 Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward 1 Left Sliding Door 3 Right Sliding Door toward the vehicle to engage the Child Protection 2 Liftgate 4 Power Switch Door Lock 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es N 021834173 Child Protection Door Lock
84. collision Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and CAUTION braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen Replacing original tires with tires of a different size sion components You could lose control and have may result in false speedometer and odometer read a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use ings only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 519 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES CAUTION Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommendations to guard To avoid damage e your vehicle or tires observe the against damage following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi e Install on front tires only tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise e Due to limited clearance a 225 65R17 tire with a occurs that could indicate device breakage Rem
85. comfortable temperature even under changing condi tions Front ATC Panel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441 1 Air Conditioning A C Button Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 2 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection 3 Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant 4 Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection Panel Bi Level Floor Mix 5 Rear Temperature Control Display This display shows the current Rear Temperature Control settings 6 Front Auto Indicator This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode 7 Auto Indicator This indicates when the system is in Auto mode 8 Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant 442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 9 Front Defrost Button Push and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected 10 Passenger Temperature Control Up Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the top bu
86. compartment The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy Rollover Events Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro priate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate A slower developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle A faster developing event may deploy the seat belt preten sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle The rollover sensing system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners with or without the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The air
87. detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after mak ing sure the rear fascia bumper is free from snow ice mud dirt and debris see your authorized dealer 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning The ParkSense amp System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense amp System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense OFF the instrument clus ter will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Fur thermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned OFF the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will reduce the radio volume when it is sounding a tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE
88. determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illumin
89. driver side power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package Instrument Panel Outlets NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob and element must be used CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty One outlet in the removable floor console if equipped shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also connected to the battery Do not exceed a maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps shared between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 Removable Console Outlet On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power outlets are located under the retractable cover To access the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it toward the instrument panel 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE a Super Console Outlets The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con
90. e 654 Seat Belt Reminder llle 320 Security AJatn iu etus RUE OR edo RR oen a 318 OeEVICB oua Edda dp e p i edu b Pd d 650 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator Side Market srt terese RR Ree Red 654 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 314 Traction Control ses estipe eaea eme 489 Turm Signal 50 05 x acres s ha paa e eg a 124 Voltage srati bebes daten mese Pur eg en e has RUN 322 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 310 Loading Vehicle 0 22s o eeu 286 Capacities usua eoe de ales eae Ea a 543 gc p LTD 501 Load Leveling System 2 0 0 0 0 cee eee 295 LOCKS m 35 DOOF us rere Se boca Eee Ew Eras 35 Lubrication Body s sese re dn ees 622 en INDEX 691 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 06 295 Ig Nuts as wales eS carte Slee ewes a kee ed us 573 Maintenance Free Battery 0000 618 Maintenance Procedures 000 00 eee 611 Maintenance Schedule 000000 eae 662 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 315 Manual Service llle 676 Map Reading Lights 00 253 Memory Feature Memory Seat LL 216 Memory Seat satanut sia eua KE aA e E 134 Methanol 05 pyrr 63054005 ERN 6x Re Ee e 531 Mini Trip Computer 0 0004 337 Mirrors 3 605 lk he ee Gk eS Hi we RE a a 131 Automatic Dimming llle 132 Electric Remote llle 133 Exterior Folding cese Ro Rees 133
91. es Manual Recline Lever To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly Head Restraints adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury death in the event of a collision by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The Active Head Restraints AHR will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under
92. extension Multi session disc formats are supported by the radio Multi session discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multi session discs The use of multi session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported cation quency kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 96 80
93. exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS a MIRRORS aei ghee rtotaneehaeateeeds 131 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 136 3o Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped 131 MH BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 132 EQUIPPED 4 ines antep ecco srt dn a 6o be 137 Outside Mirrors a sasoie ieai cc eee 133 Rost ADS HAY sae ioin i aay recess Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Modes OF Opetatiofi esos sock tessei iM Equipped escis gh e8 eso ed eae penees 133 General Information 4 145 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 133 Bi Uconnect PHONE IF EQUIPPED 145 O Power Mirrors If Equipped 133 Gl Operations had a eve ies ES eed es 147 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 134 Phone Call Features eese 155 Power Folding Mirrors
94. fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637 To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner e For chrome wheels use MOPAR Chrome Cleaner Part 04318013 or equivalent e For aluminum wheels use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner Part 04796239AB or equivalent CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough s
95. file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported cation quency kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to
96. for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635 passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and
97. for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural air pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn 522 STARTING AND OPERATING Se off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this infor mation For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire placard pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C
98. graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 678 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test whe
99. latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a phy sician immediately Keep Tire Service Kit out of WARNING Continued Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warn ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth imme diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit A Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit fl
100. lice taxi fleet or frequent trailer BJ towing Change automatic transmission X rg fluid and filter EE Inspect and replace PCV valve if X e necessary The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 667 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S ie H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE se emere RE otal 671 Impaired TDD TTY 000 673 Prepare For The Appointment 671 Service Contract uae rex Ene e e Red 673 Prepare A List sse cope RR E 671 B WARRANTY INFORMATION 674 Be Reasonable With Requests 671 B MOPAR PARTS 0 00005 675 E IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 671 W REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 675 Chrys
101. may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING Continued e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Al ways Wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all c
102. may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations STARTING AND OPERATING 555 CE e eo O O f I o O UNS O M GO G5 oo o Q 7 9 m 057003766 057003765 Four Pin Connector Seven Pin Connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes 556 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control to select a lower gear range NOTE Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the trans
103. message will be displayed a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value and the Inflate Tire to XX message in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC ru
104. nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multi session disc formats are supported by the radio Multi session discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multi session discs The use of multi session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the
105. ode hopes xd Reis 39 Windshield Defroster 00 000 eee 122 Windshield Washers 0 0000 eee eae 231 Windshield Wiper Blades 040 623 Wiper Blade Replacement 200 623 Wipers Intermittent llle 231 Zone Control Temperature Control 432 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special p
106. or abrasive You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime window cleaners on the interior surface of the by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second window time e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails If adding cargo deploy the crossbars Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars to maximum of 150 Ibs 68 kg The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity 037634930 Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must
107. parts 4 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the vehicle with the discharged battery 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle battery you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables P y in the reverse sequence 598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating
108. power sliding door switch is pushed To close the door wait until it is fully open and then push the switch again If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc tions within the same cycle the system will automati cally stop the power sliding door motor will make a dicking sound until the door has no further move ment This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the inside or outside handle If this condition occurs no damage is done to the power sliding door motor The power sliding door must be opened or closed manually WARNING You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds when either sliding door is opened This will alert other drivers in the area that passenger s could be entering or exiting the vehicle The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch from ON RUN to OFF five times ending in the ON RUN position do not start the engine 3 Within 10 seconds of the final cycle push the HAZ ARD switch ON 4 A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming You can turn the feature back on
109. re straint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facing or forward f
110. rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals
111. sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under e Low to medium blower setting Low to medium vehicle speed Low road noise Smooth road surface Fully closed windows Dry weather conditions and Operation from the driver s seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 NOTE e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Inco
112. serves you best 022607432 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position After you release the anchorage button try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release but ton To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu pant it must be removed 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe WARNING ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if when
113. situations such as an air E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become
114. stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sun roof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or Opening Sunroof Manual Mode death I To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward Ina collision there is greater risk of being thrown o full open Any release of the switch will stop the from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and your seat belt properly and make sure all passen held rearward again gers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any Press the switch forward and release it within one half object to project through the sunroof opening second and the sunroof will close automatically from any Injury may result Closing Sunroof Express 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This
115. studios 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www siriusxm com or at www siriusxm ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on push the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Push any button on the radio to exit this screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Push the SAT button until SAT appears in the display
116. the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is starte
117. the following beep say Phonebook List Names The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available 3 To call one of the names in the list push the Voice Command vk button during the playing of the desired name and say Call e The user can also exercise Edit or Delete opera tions at this point 4 The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call 5 The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Push the Phone w button to accept the call To reject the call push and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress a
118. the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter
119. the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 500 STARTING AND OPERATING x Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi cle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 501 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side
120. to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and Electronic Stability Control ESC Trailer Sway Control TSC and Hill Start Assist HSA These systems complement the Anti Lock Brake System ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneu Vers Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop A clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisti cated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interfe
121. transmission the parking brake must be engaged Picture View me BS Map Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen 3 Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA col Pressing the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func umn To exit press the back arrow button at the top left of the screen tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Play A DVD Using The VES Player If Equipped 1 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The VES player automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing the DVD NOTE The VES player has basic DVD control func tion such as Menu Play Pause FF RW and Stop 2 To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen gers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 3 To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control 1 Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at Screen 1 or 2 highlight VES DISC by either pushing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button then push ENTER OK on the Remote Control
122. usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Push the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number WARNING This feature is supported in the U S Canada and AUNG Mexico To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer NOTE gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e The emergency number dialed is based on the country e paired to the Uconnect System where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and e and have network coverage Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and Roadside Assistance Towing Assistance area If you need roadside assistance If supported this number may be programmable on e Push the Phone w button to begin some systems To do this push the Phone w button and say Setup followed by Emergency After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call a
123. vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 25 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the X Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position the light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing 26 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving or trailer E towing up long grades on hot days the auto matic transmission oil may become to
124. vehicle is in gear or the are engaged vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h F The power sliding door will operate from the outside To D The Child P Door Lock E P e P o Thisengage Tne hus Dxptceson Doar oe door handle the RKE transmitter the switches on the 1 Open the sliding side door overhead console or the switches located on the 2 Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward P pillar Sum panel quet TONO E Mie power slants away from the vehicle to disengage the Child Pro door when the shift lever is in PARK regardless of the tection Door Lock child lock lever position 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door if equipped 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LIFTGATE On vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter button or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the liftgate push the liftgate release handle located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion Liftgate Handle Location 022234174 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter Push the button on the transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate When the liftgate is fully open pushin
125. vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine
126. vehicle seat See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap proved tether anchorages in your vehicle Www 0226047162 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 4 restraint manufacturer s instructions Tether Strap Anchorages Third Row 60 40 Anchorage Shown Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting Second Row Anchorage Shown E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increa
127. will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s midsection Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency ome locking mode WARNING e The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode ture or any other seat belt function is not working 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt properly when checked according to the proce dures in the Service Manual 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could the entire seat belt is extracted increase the risk of injury in
128. with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended ees MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use Only ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Fail ure to use ATF 4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission We recommend MOPAR ATF 4 Fluid Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 662 Maintenance Chart 0 000 5 M A N T E N A N C E S ie H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehic
129. 02 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt m
130. 31 Radio Remote Controls n anaana auaa 429 Rear Air Conditioning lille ss 437 Rear Camera sic becca e a ea eee 250 Rear Cross Path ss essc e bp ado 142 Rear Heater o serer iaei i etl Solna a Feste d en 437 Rear ParkSense System ceas ateata a a ea aa 241 Rearview Mirrors 4 3 cs te rb ek e ee ds 131 Rear Window Features 000004 294 Reclining Front Seals scesa tess saia a cee eee 192 Recorder Event Data naaa aaa 94 Recreational Towing 00 0000 c eee eee 557 Reformulated Gasoline 00 0 531 Refrigerant is ciae e er HE ede heed 620 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 000 000 000 eee 58 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 FCC General Information 04 30 Programming Additional Key Fobs 17 Programming Additional Transmitters 17 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 429 Remote Starting System 00000 Removable Floor Console 0 0 Replacement Bulbs 0 00000005 Replacement Keys llle Replacement Parts llle Replacement Tires i s cese eoe Rp nea Reporting Safety Defects llle Resetting Oil Change Indicator 694 INDEX M Restraint Head llle 193 Restraints Child 2 0 0 00 cece eee 95 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 00 598 Roof Rack Luggage Rack llle 295 Rotation TireS uk 8440 kien CIR X rs 520 Saf
131. 459 Automatic Transmission ln 459 Cold Weather llle 4060 Engine Fails to Start eosa siea t ise a taii 460 ReMOTE 6004 6 RS Gs Siw al aces Ea ORC ORE RUE uos 30 696 INDEX M Starting and Operating 0045 459 Starting Procedures 000000000004 459 Steering POWCE 23 ise ad Qe eae a Aas eae i a ced 478 Tilt Column derer ane ted es SESE os 235 Wheel Heated ses Seca RR 236 Wheel THE 424 202445 3H R3 RE RRE RP 235 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 429 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 429 DIOTABE s saren uo Savas ie easy Hos ae m der eid 650 Storage Bin cs osos erede dane Ies 280 Storage Vehidle s c cesis lese 451 Storing Your Vehicle llle 650 Stow n Go Fold in Floor Seats 197 Sunglasses Storage narine eee 254 Sun Roof sies a e a eee eee ee 266 Sway Control Trailer llle 490 synthetic Engine Oll e 634449 we xS Ree 615 System RemoteStarting sissa cesa llle 30 Tachometer esee rhon aes 310 Telescoping Steering Column 235 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 440 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 321 Tilt Steering Column 0 00005 235 Tire and Loading Information Placard 501 Tite Markings ior be EE Ped gos 494 TOS uu ua chu Ear RE NCRGe eee gee Se PR 124 Aging Life of Tires lle 516 Air Pressure 0 0 00 0 506
132. 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity E STARTING AND OPERATING 515 WARNING Refer to Fr
133. 57 TEa CEOTI e eaea acis kom e E EC R UR Wie A ee ud 475 Traction Control llle 485 Traction Control Switch 2 0 0 0 0 00 0000 485 Trailer Sway Control TSC 0 490 Trailer Towing 6 0 eee eee 544 Cooling System Tips llle 557 Hitches 444 dew ERI eR RS 547 Minimum Requirements l l 550 lc TT 556 Trailer and Tongue Weight 549 WTI eset ed ep tentes bipbrs s Erit basa ds 554 698 INDEX eee Trailer Towing Guide aem a eia ae 548 Trailer Weight ccena eai Roe ole edes 548 TransMission amp bk e GP neediest weeds e d 633 Aut matie iua Sake eR re es aC d 462 El id s eesse ga ech ae ES hence S e Bee done 633 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 28 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 257 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets iiia daris adena ee 119 Tread Wear Indicators 00000005 515 Trip Odometer 6 6 eee 311 Turn Signals iso eter ERda eee gee a 310 UCI Connectot exea ex ea OE etd 376 Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity 164 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode 358 Operating Instructions CD Mode 353 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Playing MP3 Files Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio Multimedia Satellite Radio 371 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 359
134. B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Example Tire Placard Location B Pillar Example Tire Placard Location Door 502 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos e SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9S7ORT4 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 503 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle
135. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 0226002260 Second Row Bench Cinch Cinching Latch Plate 0226002258 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Second Row Captains Chair ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 Lap Shoulder Belt Systems What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing chil
136. CHAINS Acer ee eaten UA RO Aan ee NU PCR eg ote 519 Changing x ets sb REOR RR Rn eng d 575 Compact Spare sega gap nn E eE ae R E 513 General Information sanana aeaaea 506 Fligh Speed cui ee cm pee ec A 509 Inflation Pressures lisi 507 PACK Geers sia sk Goa e Sieg wk Em dore i nes 575 en INDEX 697 Lite of Dites iae eem eden Po 516 Load Capacity X doas ipapa uiia nigi 501 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 521 Pressure Warning Light 314 Quality Grading 44 1244 ve 6 RERO 677 Radial wie cakes oe ira S Ea E s eas 509 Replacement sisse poe Ree e gs 517 Rotation o c dg te Bates doas das 520 Safety serus gea wa ete ee om AE ee ed 494 SIZES PC 496 SHOW TIPES sia eam enr ere erra wo 511 Spare Mites 2 alse e xs iea 6X educ 576 Spinning iab ees c oed esu ev ears 515 Trailer Towing a coe eR sses ed eade ta 552 Tread Wear Indicators 05 515 Tire Safety Information 0045 494 Tire gervi Kit oo eter RET whe ans 562 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight iss 549 Torque Converter Clutch 004 474 TOWING aga x he pce dem EEE ea ed 544 24 Hour Towing Assistance sss 160 Disabled Vehicle 0 0 00 ce eee 601 Guide sra soporte acd E ae WS E OR ase 548 Recreational 45 23 eae eR eaea eR ea 557 Weights sae tenes ania dees uid PUER deus 548 Towing Assistance les 160 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 5
137. Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pushing the accelera tor and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Event Data Recorder EDR These data can help provide a better understanding of This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like
138. DE For CD And MP3 Audio Play 00000 353 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 355 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 358 Uconnect 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 359 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 359 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MES Audio Play 2226s te3 b wa 365 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 367 LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 370 INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 370 Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped 371 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped i csse RIDERS ERR seats ge 376 E iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 376 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Devite z suck ea torpe due Donee Rentas 377 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Using This Feature s sssi oss ssis sa stoei 378 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 378 Play M0d lt 4 944e 5 aoe re En ee EY 378 List Or Browse Mode 380 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 382 E Uconnect MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED 235gk or eq y 044844005 383 Getting Started iios sce rdg 383 Blu ray Disc Player sa nemre kenes 384 Play Video Games nnana aaa 385 Listen To An Au
139. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions Full forward position Full rearward position Normal position Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror controls are located on the driver side door trim panel 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Mirror Controls The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right to select th
140. E control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTR
141. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Auto Unlock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit features in accordance with local laws WINDOWS Power Vent Windows If Equipped Power Vent Window Switch Open Close The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver s door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent windows from the driver s seat 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Power Windows You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver s door trim panel The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position and during power acces sory delay Driver s Power Window Switches NOTE Power Window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening a front door will cancel this feature Power Window Lockout Switch If Equipped The driver may lock out the rear power windows by pushing the bar switch just below the power window switches THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 switches will operate on
142. EH Select Mode HA SAT s AM DISC WEATHER 135 10 FM AUX WEATHER Wes DISC Hi The Weather Channel Ves AUX1 B Weather Channel I2 NU VAM Pd Mother Nature Enter to Select 044874310 Select VES DISC Mode On The VES Screen es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 NOTE e Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen e Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen The VES will retain the last setting when turned off Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls 1 Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate 2 Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST button on the touch screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen DVD Video Menu m Setting FER My Files DVD Setup Fm Sereen Saver Default Vi System Setup Play Pause EHOW Picture bus her VE ag 5 Ma Audio Control m View Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen 3 Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the DISC button on the touchscreen in the VES column To exit press the back arrow button on the touchscreen at the top left of the screen Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp ES 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rear VES Controls DISC AUX1 AUX AUX2 Select Channel Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column NOTE To view
143. ENT PANEL 419 The recommended method for labeling recordable discs CD R CD RW and DVD R is with a permanent marker Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc become stuck and cause permanent damage to the DVD player Compressed Audio Files MP3 WMA and ACC The DVD Blu ray Player if equipped is capable of playing MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 and WMA Win dows Media Audio files from a CD Data disc usually a CD R or CD RW e The DVD player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format so MP3 files must always end with the extension mp3 or MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension wma or WMA AAC files must always end with the exten sion aac or AAC To prevent incorrect playback do not use these extensions for any other types of files For MP3 files only version 1 ID3 tag data such as artist name track title album etc are supported For Blu ray files only version 1 0 1 1 22 2 3 and 2 4 ID3 tag data such as artist name track title album etc are supported Any file that is copy protected such as those down loaded from many online music stores will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file Other compression formats such as AAC MP3 Pro Ogg Vorbis and ATRAC3 will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin play ing the next available file If you ar
144. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 e e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the EVIC CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem when using Park
145. FF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or rema
146. G AND OPERATING es Wl POWER STEERING 2320 teh Rea 478 Tire Identification Number TIN 498 Power Steering Fluid Check 478 Tire Terminology And Definitions 500 E PARKING BRAKE ein dane ad ex xd RR rx 479 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 501 M BRAKE SYSTEM 60204464 e ek ees Ras 482 W TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 506 E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 482 Tite Pressure 2 4 4 204 244 on ce trinti st 506 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 482 Tire Inflation Pressures 507 Traction Control System TCS 485 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 509 Brake Assist System BAS 486 Radial Ply Tires scce bisce RE 509 Electronic Stability Control ESC 487 Tire LDypeSi sse sg oie oe ea Beare Ae ooo 510 Trailer Sway Control TSC 490 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 512 Hill Start Assist HSA 491 Spare Tires If Equipped 512 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 494 Tire SPINNING 2a ye y RR FERE ES 515 Tire Markings s 2a era Ee dead 494 Tread Wear Indicators 515 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457
147. HICLE 030938627 Tumbled Second Row Seat Seat In Storage Bin 6 Push the seat into the storage bin 7 Close the storage bin cover ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 CAUTION To Unstow Second Row Seats 1 Pull the st in latch h The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to a a AMI ae UN avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks 2 Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage which have minimal clearance to the cover bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors WARNING 3 Lift the seatback to the full upright position In a collision serious injury could result if the seat 4 Return the head restraint to its upright position close storage bin covers are not properly latched the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers mechanism to the Unlocked position open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion e Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched 1 Return the seatback to the upright position e Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collisio
148. HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 90032 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Selection Of Coolant CAUTION Continued Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information thorized dealer as soon as possible CAUTION e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tif
149. Heated s tese esce t edere ae opem el acm de 134 MeOMORY srs ca aides ane roni Ep erint 216 OUTSIDE ic sse Seed qe obti ades Bee ed 133 ReakVIeW oua xh Bead ness RUE Sead deas 131 VANITY 2 244 407 28 padded pb e n P PUR hong 136 Mode Fuel Saver su zuerst ens 336 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System sess 521 MOPAR Parts llle 611 MTBE EIBE se cer TERRE TRY xs 531 Multi Function Control Lever llus 229 New Vehicle Break In Period 119 Occupant Restraints 6 asa yii aa ati aig eee 56 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 530 Odometer srrares ieai eh eee 311 Oil Change Indicator sse RR ee 312 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 0 312 Oil ENGINE ss sri a aes E kir e apap dU a wa 613 692 INDEX MM Capacity sccbaen bane hemi e eon d ch 656 Change Interval p serpant ker Rad dr 613 Checking 52 ied tide A Rb eee RES UE E 613 Disposal ia oc Sate eb Se retreat wed 615 Filter 43 ae vedere aes ie Re RR Ed 615 Filter Disposal cc sce ga gee dere UR RR eee 615 Identification Logo llle 614 Materials Added to iliis 615 Recommendation less 613 Synthetic iiia eee eee serpi ee ERG E 615 VISCOS 2 25080 4495 deep R SUR eee Se ne 614 Oil Filter Selection llle 615 Onboard Diagnostic System 04 608 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 257 Operator Man
150. If Equipped 135 Uconnect Phone Features 159 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Advanced Phone Connectivity ll VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation Commands Voice Training ll SEATS Power Seats If Equipped Power Lumbar If Equipped Heated Seats If Equipped Manual Front Second Row Seat Adjuster Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect 191 Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped 192 Head Restraints suari sarenu sei 0000000 193 Stow n Go Seating If Equipped 197 Quad Seats If Equipped 204 Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped 208 Third Row Power Recline If Equipped 209 Third Row Power Folding Seat If Equipped 210 Manually Folding Third Row Seats If Equipp d iacente erac e Res 212 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks 216 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 216 Programming The Memory Feature 217 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory lessen 218 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
151. L control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character Dis
152. LOCKS c o4 end seg Sins shaw ered 35 Manual Door Locks 00005 35 Power Door Locks If Equipped 37 WINDOWS recs 2548042420545 24498245 39 Power Vent Windows If Equipped 39 Power Windows 00000 eese 40 SLIDING SIDE DOOR e torg coc mitir ea ee 44 Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped 45 Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock 49 IPT GALE 3x dicc ue Soma FoU we da qa rad 52 Power Liftgate If Equipped 53 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 56 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Important Safety Precautions 56 Transporting Passengers 4 120 Seat Belt Systems 000000005 58 Exhaust Gaasi suspi agay abas ai e TARR D 121 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 80 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 2 Child Restraints enu mis ord cud oi ean 95 Vehicle bee PRO Ee SUR ed s 122 T tine Pet 119 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside edente ppcatue genie The Vig tutes duuo Rue Pt ERERO 124 ll ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 119 B SAFETY TIPS 0 0 00 0s 120 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignitio
153. Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions 1 Enable Bluetooth on your mobile phone 2 Push the Phone button to begin 3 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing 4 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Iden tification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if mul
154. MEO years RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station following conditions tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED including interference that may cause undesired op eration This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved 2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve by the party responsible for compliance could void the niently from outside the vehicle while still user s authority to operate the equipment maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m ae 5 NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will Remote Start e e e e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pushed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pushed System not disabled from previous remote st
155. N RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 10 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously w
156. NDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 Push the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Push this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting
157. NE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C mm system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a 562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat WARNING Continued do not open the hood until the radiator has had time from the engine cooling system CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for Small punctures up to 14 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit Foreign object
158. NOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs on each door trim panel If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021834163 Manual Door Lock 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side WARNING sliding door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move Sliding Door Lock the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Power Door Locks If Equipped If you push the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This pr
159. On The Touchscreen 3 To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel 1 press the 2 button on 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM the touchscreen and choose an audio source To exit Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System press the back arrow button at the top left of the left screen e VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously Rear VES Controls e The Blu ray Disc Player can play CDs DVDs and by Favorites MEDIA Ves 00 12 MI HOD MIR TRK 1 of 109 FM DISC AUX1 Blu ray Discs The DVD Player can play CDs and DVDs 1 In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 g g SAT AUX AUX2 and the right side equates to Channel 2 SCAN INFO Selecting a video source on Channel 1 the video aa source will display on the second row screen or Screen 12 00 amp LOCK 1 and can be heard on Channel 1 Select Channel Screen 2 And HDD In The Media Column UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 Selecting a video source on Channel 2 the video VES Remote Control If Equipped source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2 and can be heard on Channel 2 The 2nd row screen and 3rd row screen of the Video Entertainment System can play two separate discs by utilizing the touchscreen radio DVD player and Blu ray Disc Player e Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the screen s are closed VCR
160. R OK button 4 After all of the digits are entered navigate to the Go button and push the remote control s ENTER OK button Station List Menu When listening to Satellite audio pushing the remote control s POP UP MENU button displays a list of all available channels Navigate this list using the remote control s navigation buttons A V to find the desired station push the remote control s ENTER OK button to tune to that station To jump through the list more quickly navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen 414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Disc Menu S amp Lo MUTE Preset 10 2 Fi WEATHER EB Disc Menu Start Scan Stop Random WEATHER The Weather Channel The Weather Channel Mother Nature 044874309 Disc Menu For CDs When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc pushing the remote control s POP UP MENU button displays a list of all commands which control playback of the disc Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random play Display Settings When watching a video source DVD Video with the disc in Play mode Aux Video etc pressing the remote control s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances To change the settings press t
161. R button that will enable you to access the system When you push the button you will hear the word Uconnect amp followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section VR The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain operations comp
162. RE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS housing Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the the front of the housing Press the bottle into the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a housing An audible click will be heard indicating the properly calibrated torque wrench bottle is locked into place Torque Specifications 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut storage area located on the bottom of the air pump Bolt Size ab Socket 7 Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle Size 100 Ft Lbs 135 N m M12 x 1 25 19 mm Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening 574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 0605006372 Torque Patterns After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be Wheel Mounting Surface sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel nut bolt has been tightened twice 0605005441
163. RES Rear Window Defroster E LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ll ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED Deploying The Crossbars E SUN SCREENS IF EQUIPPED gi wie sex ec ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Manual Rearview Mirror 030407085 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean ee UNDERSTAN
164. RK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED Leeereestee 99399 x9 xe mr 241 ParkSense Sensors sess 242 ParkSense amp Warning Display 242 ParkSense Display lesen 243 Enabling Disabling ParkSense amp 247 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist SySlemis ia eaae eese Ca eee d e edes 247 Cleaning The ParkSense System 248 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 248 E PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EOUIPPED ssaa nara eie are b REUS deus 250 E OVERHEAD CONSOLES 253 Front Overhead Console 253 Courtesy Interior Lighting 253 Sunglass Storage Non Sunroof Only 254 Rear Courtesy Reading Lights If Equipped 256 Rear Overhead Consoles If Equipped 256 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 257 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 268 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 259 Pinch Protect Feature llle 268 Programming A Rolling Code 259 Venting Sunroof Express 268 Programming A Non Rolling Code 261 Sunshade Operation Canadian Gate Operator Programming 263 Wind Buffeting sss c
165. RMATION Tire Markings jS 7 e esas v NOM 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades en STARTING AND OPERATING 495 NOTE e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 496 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart
166. Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side 570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle HU ie aor nof inflate barat Teast 20 pent ag storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve pressure within 15 minutes hicle CAUTION NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla e The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom hot after use so it should be handled carefully mended inflation pressure before continuing e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the Tire Service Tire Service Kit components which may cause Kit permanent damage to the kit If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 2 Remove the Speed Limit s
167. Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 i Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the Tire Service Kit Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 4 8 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the
168. Sense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF You are responsible for safety and must continue to EQUIPPED pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear can result in serious injury or death Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the displayed on the touchscreen along with a caution note to vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can check entire surroundings across the top of the screen result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles After five seconds this note will disappear The because the hitch ball will be much closer to the ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker above the rear license plate sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear
169. System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE It is not necessary to move the temperature settings The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle 450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control To change the te
170. TE This section is for Uconnect 130 230 radios only For Uconnect 430 430N 730N 731N 735N or 431 touchscreen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate Supplement Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the glove compart ment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB connector port which is located in the glove compartment USB Port NOTE The glove compartment will have a position where the iPod or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid This allows routing of the cable without
171. TS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION cate stele nesti cis besa duas piei de taeae Eta Rida dia 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE i e 9 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 000 e 125 mE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL see hen 303 s STARTING AND OPERATING aa toute theo park dere wks Dau v pa Rod a old 455 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 cre s ek E REDE EY TTE EEUU BARI RR A 559 6 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4299 53d 33 CEDAR ERE ee aeterarstaereen sees 605 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 4 6uid tud ces PR ERES VOCE e UE mande doe bd d 661 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 46 tke tke REX RERER CREER RR d 669 9 INDEX peda 679 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION Se INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is
172. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 476 STARTING AND OPERATING EEEEEEEEEEEEEAMAAEARAMAMMEEEEEEE NNNM DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Cautions safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warnings before doing so Flowing Rising Water WARNING WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising wat
173. UMENT PANEL 361 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio push the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio push the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Push the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROL
174. UNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display push the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on CAUTION the top line and the first item in that list on the second line Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in ex treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam age the device Follow the device manufacturer s To exit List mode without se
175. VEHICLE 289 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders inside the console for cell phones or other electronics and a convenient storage tray e Rear occupant accessible e Multiple adjustments e Removable from vehicle for additional floor space The top and center console sections slide forward and rearward to provide added user comfort A one piece cup holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning The cupholders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz 6 L bottles 035335307 Console Position 1 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Bins erage area helow Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a rearward position This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cupholders for the second row passengers f Ld 035335308 Console Position 2 035335309 Console Position 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291 Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost To Remove The Premium Floor Console position Again lifting second latch handle at the front of the console allows complete access to a lower storage bin and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers j 2 Lift the rear of the conso
176. Vehicle Security Alarm E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph 8 km h NOTE e When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing the PANIC button a second time you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency RF noises of the system e The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is running Power Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Push the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open Close the Power Liftgate If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed the liftgate will reverse to the full open position The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead console If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear pillar pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is armed using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate
177. Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 548 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission 3 6L Automatic GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating 8 750 lbs 3 969 kg Frontal Area 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Max GTW Gross Trailer Weight Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 3 600 Ibs 1 633 kg Max Tongue Weight 360 Ibs 163 kg 8 750 Ibs 3 969 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 to 5 persons amp Luggage 3 350 lbs 1 519 kg 335 Ibs 152 kg 8 750 Ibs 3 969 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 6 to 7 persons amp Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1 360 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds For vehicles equipped with Fold in Floor seating the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 Ibs 45 kg NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer
178. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 Getting Started e Screen s located in the overhead console Unfold the overhead LCD screen s by pushing the button on the overhead console behind the screen s 044940903 Video Entertainment System VES 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e e Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard DVD player or a Blu ray Disc Player If equipped with a Blu ray Disc Player the icon will be present on the Player Turn on the Player if equipped on Dual Screen Sys tem by pushing the Power button located on the far left or by pushing the button on the Remote Control When the Video Screen s are open and a DVD Blu ray Disc is inserted into the VES player the screen s turn s on automatically the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins For Dual Video Screen System Channel 1 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 second row and Channel 2 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 third row Refer to the Dual Video Screen section for more information The system can be controlled by the front seat occu pants using either the touchscreen radio the DVD or Blu ray Disc Player or by the rear seat occupants using the remote control Blu ray Disc Player Play A Blu ray Disc To view a Blu ray disc insert the disc into the Blu ray VES disc Player Playback will be
179. a BH ea POR CHIETI Roe P RR E 12 Ignition Key Removal 000020000 u 14 Illuminated Entry isc dure ica e RR era wi a 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 004 15 Information Center Vehicle 0 324 Inside Rearview Mirror 0000 000s 131 Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 0 eee eee 308 Instrument Panel and Controls 307 Instrument Panel Cover 000000 ee 638 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 640 Integrated Power Module Fuses 642 Interior Appearance Care 00 0005 638 Interior Lights ice pina ER mea 226 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 232 Introduction iPod USB MP3 Control Hood stesso acne sees Saath ergs Ie EE Bluetooth Streaming Audio 181 Lead Free Gasoline llle Leaks Flaid c4 2254044222000 S4 eRPS ES Jack Location 5 3 ace eWEEK ha OE DOE does 576 Life of Ties spies RR RR Re RARE RR ee Jack Operation cesa eee ie RES b Liftgate i vibe hae e cese RAS ER GL Es JUMP Starting us dex acta ena e der UO RR eR e 594 Light Bulbs s cera eer E ERR eps Lights 442a eee bu EU 4564 85 Key Fob PAID ix ied ts Sad ea noting ahd ebat e dur Programming Additional Key Fobs 17 AMAT eue pee ears aetna s PI a Programming Additional Transmitters I7 ADi Lok cs or donee ha ate a ene gh Key In Reminder llle 15 Automatic Headlights 0 Keyless Entry
180. a DVD on the radio push the RADIO MEDIA button on the radio faceplate then press the DISC tab button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO button on the touchscreen Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not available in all states provinces If available the ve hicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with an automatic trans mission In vehicles with a manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Play A Blu ray Disc Using The Blu ray Player If Equipped 1 Insert the Blu ray Disc with the label facing up The Blu ray Player automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing the Blu ray Disc NOTE The Blu ray Player has basic control functions such as Menu Play Pause FF RW and Stop 2 To watch a Blu ray Disc on Screen 1 for second row passengers ensure the Remote Control and Head phone switch is on Channel 1 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395 3 To watch a Blu ray Disc on Screen 2 for third row Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls passengers ensure the Remote Control and Head phone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control i5 Push the SOURCE button on the Blu ray Player Remote Control While looking at Screen 1 or 2 highlight Blu ray by either pushing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button then push OK on the Re
181. aT mp T C uc 2015 rand Caravan OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2014 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTEN
182. acing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat u
183. adjustments are inoperable Rear Mode Control Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode e S Air comes from the floor outlets 440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped Front Three Zone ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode operation a comfort temperature can be set by using the temperature up and down buttons and the auto blower operation will be set automatically The system can be controlled manually if desired SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones allowing one comfort setting driver setting for the cabin if desired The Three Zone ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers The system automatically adjusts the air temperature the airflow volume amount of outside air recirculation and the airflow direction This maintains a
184. adlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON the delay will be cancelled ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on To change the timer setting see your autho rized dealer The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature Lights On Reminder If the headlights or the parking lights are left on or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the ignition switch is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in a
185. ae ed aeg Eee 72 Rear SCAU 5 sedora no e RR r da e aus ps 59 Untwisting Procedure 000 70 CALS 39 veh pte enacting buts fon tais ed EE tide CD ded 183 Adjustment xe aes Eb Re te bedi eor des 183 Fold in Floor Stow n Go 2 0 00005 197 MEMOJ ece pase ha ER keh ae ee doe 216 POWGr 3c e ERE LG See Cale aes 184 Reclining eresien e awane eea EEA 192 Stow n Go Fold in Floor 00 197 Security Alarm eses sauman eee 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 657 SENTRY KEY FCC General Information 0 17 Key Programming 0 00000 e eee 17 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Replacement 00 16 Service Assistance clle eee 671 Service Contract 0 eee 673 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 315 Service Manuals llle 676 Settings Personal i222 ree ig PER A 342 Setting the Clock 5 xS RES n 351 Shift Lever Override llle 599 Shoulder Belts se cra csrr aspra ee es 59 Signals TUM e os v4 bk RAE Rond ord eR EO 124 Sliding Door isi rer bae 44 Snow Chains Tire Chains is rera ssis 519 Snow Tires 2 2 4c beta e Lc HR e 34 511 Spare Tire lt td cede e ede omn a ab eed Sines 513 Spark Plugs ose osea dE REAPER REID 657 Speed Control Cruise Control 237 Speedomelter 315 wha oe wipe Rae Retos 317 Starting oss ades em d ere oA Re eR mo od
186. air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result 1 2 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door Pivot the glove compartment downward Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover 622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 072607165 A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood h
187. al ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 510 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than a 1 4 of an inch 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 511 WARNING Do not use summer tires in snow ice conditions You Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction i
188. ally if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control Buttons When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 ON OFF 3 SET accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph tM LLL ee NEM n 40 km h 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control
189. ar ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 2 7 in 22 7 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If your vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC your dealership can activate deactivate this feature for you For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the fro
190. ar 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 87 Octane 658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx es CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible
191. arkSense will reduce the radio volume if on when the system is sounding an audio tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 Enabling Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When ParkSense is disabled the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
192. art event Vehicle security alarm not active Ignition in Off position WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Continued 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the REMOTE START button C on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If your
193. arting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 031640311 _ Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element th
194. ary Alternate s home redial language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones mobile mute mute off send set up towing assistance phone settings or phone set up new entry transfer call no Uconnect Tutorial other voice training pair a phone work phone pairing pairing yes phonebook previous phone book record again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation gt The Uconnect Voice Command system allows 4 you to control your AM FM radio disk player USB mass storage class device iPod family of devices Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device satellite radio and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize us
195. at Continued 568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the igni tion Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit T Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569 NOTE
196. at helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls e Press the heated steering wheel button amp once to turn the heating element ON e Press the heated steering wheel button amp a second time to turn the heating element OFF NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programed to come on during a remote start Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 WARNING The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especi
197. ated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Push and release the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then push and release the SELECT button 3 Push and releasethe DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC then push and release the SELECT button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 4 Push and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compa
198. ated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617 WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
199. ated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and Continued CAUTION Continued warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked 9 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME the O
200. ately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs 544 STARTING AND OPERATING Se TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions w
201. ation 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setu Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming Device Towing a KH Announcement le P n ee untenones oues Seict a language Engiish Espanol or Francais Prompts orvoff ay 4 digit lud Lists pin code Phones s ui to be deleted mm Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero all one call two cancel three four five confirmation prompts continue delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star English plus erase all pound Espanol add location Francais help 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primary Alternate s Prim
202. ation Label 541 Towsng Due Venice GOMA owe VEEE ee E TRAILER TOWING eee ee ee 544 Recreational Towing All Models 558 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if in a location accessible to children and do not leave present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless belts Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN Mode A WARNING child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key qup Automatic Transmission fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK access to an unlocked vehicle position before you can start the engine Press the brake e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is pedal before shifting into any driving gear dangerous for a number of reasons A child or Normal Starting others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking 1 Do not press the accelerator brake brake pedal or the shift lever 2 Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START pos
203. ay Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character
204. ay Next or Previous Track While a track is playing push the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pushing the INFO button again jumps to e e the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button push will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or push the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Push the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first ten seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track push the SCAN button again During Scan mode pushing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM device or push the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pushing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device T
205. b sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero This also displays Trip A and Trip B DTE MPG or L 100km OAT Outside Air Temperature information to Base Cluster use STEP and RESET button on steering wheel to access or reset the display Message Display Area When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display OOK cuo e Gag ses AE er ss Door Ajar GATE ph ete yeti e wa x ERR RR ein Liftgate Ajar LOW rE jects edo RES Low Tire Pressure BASCAP wee verde ete esa edo ys Fuel Cap Fault noEUSE 2294 Se dae one E ae Ws Fuse Fault 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoCOOL NOTE Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area located in the instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for further information LoW tirE WTCC Low Coolant When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehi
206. battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter DO NOT crank the engine for more than 15 second intervals at one time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should mm be repeated After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
207. bed as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED Two 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets are located on the lower instrument panel below the open storage bin The driver side power outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger side power outlet is connected directly to the battery The
208. belt even though you have air bags Continued 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses WARNING Continued In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued WARNING Continued Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hi
209. brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s This could cause inadequate braking and possible hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake personal injury system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required collision Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over collision 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg e 554 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package
210. camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen appears again If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned On the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex ceeds 8 mph 13 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position NOTE The programmable features of the Parkview Rear Backup Camera can be selected through the touch screen Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for further information When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE a WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to
211. causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search push the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pushing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time push and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button all
212. ck Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect ve satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in are affected by improper tire pressure loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Tire Pressure e Safety and Vehicle Stability Economy e Tread Wear e Ride Comfort Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 507 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for
213. ck and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING Continued anchorage that is approved for that seating position located behind the top of the
214. cks This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care On models that are equipped with remote start the when using the seat heater It may cause burns driver s heated seat can be programmed through the even at low temperatures especially if used for Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC to come on long periods of time during a remote start Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru Continued ment Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located on the switch bank below the climate controls You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Pres
215. cle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available ee STARTING AND OPERATING 531 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty 532 STARTING AND OPERATING xs E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible
216. cle is started noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The Electron
217. collisions 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Continued 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats The locked mode is only used to install rear facing or forward facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both th
218. come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 23 Oil Pressure Warning Light R7 This light indicates low engine oil pressure The 8 8 P light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 24 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the
219. come with a built in storage compart ment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened To remove the remote use your index finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you Do not try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult to remove To return the remote back into its storage area insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips first and then rotate the remote back up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back into position VCR 05255 The Remote Control Storage E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405 Locking The Remote Conirol All remote control functionality can be disabled as a parental control feature To disable the Remote Control from making any changes push the Video Lock button on the DVD player if equipped If the vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player follow the radio s instructions to turn Video Lock on The radio and the video screen s indicate when Video Lock is active Pushing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES Replacing The Remote Control Batteries The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op eration To replace the batteries 1 Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote then slide the battery cover downward 2 Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown 3
220. could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619 WARNING e Bat
221. ct the CV joints X X X X X EE Inspect front suspension tie rod tef ends boot seals and replace if X X X X X X X necessary Inspect the brake linings replace as necessary x x i A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 665 lI A Mileage or time passed o o o o e o o o e e e e e l whichever comes first 9 9 8 S8 8 S8 S S S S S S S S N amp 8 9 5 8 8 8 8 er zz 5H Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 v ggsg8 2 828 2 2 2 sg gf i Y R 5 5 N eo e ce N eo t e 8 9 3 8g r 2 9 E Additional Maintenance S Replace engine air filter X X X ie ics Wan H Replace cabin air conditioning X X X X X X E filter D Replace spark plugs 3 6L en X U gine L Flush and replace the engine E coolant at 10 years or 150 000 X X 8 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first i 666 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A l Mileage or time passed o o o o e o o o Ss Ss Ss 2 N whichever comes firs 9 S 8 8S 8 8 8 8 siele e s qa o 9 5 cR 9 9 9 rs 2 s m Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o o lolo 2 e e Q 2 2 2 2 2 S 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 83 8 8 T 5 7 gt y N eo e e N eo t e E 95419199 Se ee fy Change automatic transmission fed fluid and filter if using your ve S hicle for any of the following po X a
222. ction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the seat belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped ie Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect 116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling ba
223. d mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 673 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s serv
224. d restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child re straint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and fixed quad seats are removable 2nd row stow n go head restraints are not remov able The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the seat belt path of the child restraint Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor 114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5 position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retract
225. d the previously stored mode will be recalled and used General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS GEN 210 220 310 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 The device may not cause harmful interference 2 The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Uconnect PHONE IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect Customer Support e U S residents visit UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 e Canadian res
226. damaging it while closing the lid If a cut out is not available in the glove compartment route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Using This Feature By using an iPod cable or an external USB device to connect to the USB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To enter the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either push the AUX button on th
227. dealer immediately structions for cleaning Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF posi tion Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Unlock the doors automatically System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON RUN to ignition OFF Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Occupant Re straint Controller ORC monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components e ry The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the O
228. der the vehicle en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591 WARNING 3 Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down and place the tire into the compact spare tire cover assembly Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the wheel and compact spare tire cover assembly so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the compact spare tire cover on the opposite Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have been properly extended through the center of the wheel and compact spare tire cover assembly Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could side CAUTION The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used result in loss of the compact spare tire and cover assembly which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle control and serious personal injury when the compact spare tire is stored Failure to use this cover could drastically reduce the life of the compact spare tire 4 Using the winch T handle rotate the drive nut to the nmm right until the compact spare tire cover assembly is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle 5 Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be overtightened Check under the vehicle to ensure the 592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES compact spare tire cover assembly is positioned cor rectly against the underside of the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is d
229. der with either side up 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Removing Key Fob From Ignition WARNING Continued Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is OFF position and then remove the Key Fob dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector NOTE Power window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening the front door will cancel this feature WARNING Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and push ignition button to place ignition in OFF position When leaving the vehicle always lock your ve hicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended
230. dio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channell 388 Dual Video Screens sesa i ereta aaia aa 389 Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio 389 Play A DVD Using The VES Player If Equipped ce RE Ee we 392 Play A Blu ray Disc Using The Blu ray Player lf Equipped 455444 e Remp 394 nm Playing i ke Rh RE ee res 396 Important Notes For Dual Video Screen SYSTE o sce tera recs ERR e d ce Re RE wae 398 VES Remote Control If Equipped 399 Blu ray Player Remote Control If Equipped ska dicta eee ead 402 Remote Control Storage lt se cessa llle 404 Locking The Remote Control 405 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 306 Replacing The Remote Control Batteries 405 Headphones Operation 4 405 Blu ray Headphones Operation 406 ControclS i i eise edo ek Ras 408 Replacing The Headphone Batteries 409 Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty 5 actin pede key oed eae d 409 System Information 00 410 E STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED vei eem em Ee ed 429 Radio Operation 00 430 CD Player uere rem etd 430 E CD DVD Blu ray Disc MAINTENANCE 431 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 431
231. does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Open Close Left Power Sliding Door If Equipped Push the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open Close the Left Power Sliding Door If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed pushing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve hicle Security Alarm Power Open Close Right Power Sliding Door If Equipped Push the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open Close the Right Power Sliding Door If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed pushing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve hicle Security Alarm Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock If Equipped This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped w
232. don must bean NEUTRAL improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty be towed faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed truck or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 607 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 608 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 608 E EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 543442 x XR X CS d 609 B REPLACEMENT PARTS 4 sek a rng 611 E DEALER SERVICE sis arcc ACERO CHO e 611 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 611 Erigme Qil aute esda actus v eb RUE Y eae 613 Engine OIL Filters aes nes 615 Engine Air Cleaner Filter llus 615 Exhaust System 0 00000 000 0000 616 Maintenance Free Battery 618 Air Conditioner Maintenance 620 Body Lubrication llle Windshield Wiper Blades Cooling System
233. ds Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo Delete All to delete all memos Setup To switch to system setup you may say one of the following e e e Change to setup Switch to system setup Main menu setup Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English Language French Language Spanish ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice Command vRbutton first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Push the Voice Command vk button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be re peated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only
234. due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings e Using tire chains on the vehicle e Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles With Compact Spare e The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn on 526 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid e For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off as l
235. e 7 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for proper wheel lug nut torque 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter mo
236. e WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL may come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is E STARTING AND OPERATING 541 properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic Sys tem in Maintaining Your Vehicle
237. e me deaths E ge 624 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0005 121 Flooded Starting ccs Res 460 Fuel Requirements llle 530 Oltre d aie Rma Re tb Breen atten Sed dud 613 Oil S lectioi s 11d RR haee Ree dete te 8 613 Oil Synthetie x cet durae Ro Prae EUR eo 615 Overheating s ix 43 ed pe eR eu Rd ads 561 DATING Soo gn a ee ae id ET ende acid 459 Temperature Gauge 000000000000 321 Engine Oil Viscosity 6 6 eee eee eee 614 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart llle 614 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 91 Entry System Illuminated 000 19 Ethanol isse RERO TES 531 Event Data Recorder llle 94 Exhaust Gas Caution 2 0 0 00 000 eee eee 121 Exhaust System 6 6 eee 121 Exterior Lights 3 4s ese uS v pde a etes 124 Fabric Cares cas ses e p oe ad e RR ES d 638 Filler Location Fuel llle 317 Filters Air Cleaner lee eee 615 686 INDEX M Air Conditioning ask Sessami a heii aep 452 Engine Qil c pac edad ER IE a Rade awd 615 Engine Oil Disposal 5o Rn baad 615 Flashers Hazard Warning 2 were Res 561 Turn Signal ssa aoe gene aa eae derer rers 124 Flash To Pass 21s cedente e gg 8 230 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range isses d esana aia 538 Engine Oll sich ences e p be c did 537 Fuel Requirements 000 535 Maintenance 2 0 00 0 538 Replacement Parts 538 virium 538 Flooded Engine Start
238. e The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Sound Horn With Remote Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e A For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Push the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then push the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by push ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
239. e brake pedal or the shift lever Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 WARNING Continued e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not CAUTION leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift The following indicators should be used to ensure that lever could result you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi e DO NOT race the engine when shifting from tion PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever can damage the drivetrain all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is REVERSE R fully seated This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into book al bs transmission gear position display and REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop verify that it indicates the PARK position P 470 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be sta
240. e mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further informa tion Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped NOTE If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph The switch for the power folding mirrors is located 16 km h the folding feature will be disabled between the power mirror switches L left and R right If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in speed is equal or greater than 10 mph 16 km h they pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors will automatically unfold E ase nota GS perio Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the follo
241. e vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones To delete Uconnect phone paired mobile phones using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also push the Phone w button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features push the Phone button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Push and hold the Voice Command VR button for five seconds until the session begins or o Push the Voice Command vRbutton and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is pa
242. e Auxiliary RCA input jacks or HDMI port located on the left side behind the second row seat 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 044874313 RCA HDMI USB Inputs 4 USB Ports Charge Only 5 Power Inverter 1 HDMI Port 2 Audio Video In 3 Power Outlet When connecting an external source to the AUX input be sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks NOTE Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion 3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the vehicle s Power Inverter Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle s Owner s Manual for more information Using The Remote Control 1 Push the MODE button on the Remote Control en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 2 While looking at the video screen highlight VES Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls AUX 1 by either pushing Up Down Left Right but tans or by repeatedly pushing the MODE button then 1 Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate push ENTER on the Remote Control 2 Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is EH Select Mode 2 EY amp we displayed press the HIDE LIST button on the touch screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen AM DISC WEATHER Preset 10 135 FM AUX WEATHER SAT Wes DISC DVD Video Menu peo Display Setting FER My Files DVD Setup Fm Screen es Saver M The Weat
243. e CAUTION Continued turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer 21 Low Fuel Light drops back into the normal range If the pointer When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 22 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should
244. e Com partment illustration in this section NOTE MOPAR SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting MS 6395 is not available ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high q
245. e cover means of a cable winch mechanism The spare tire drive nut is located on the floor under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console or under front super console forward bin liner SS Jack And Tool Location Spare Tire Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577 To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the spare tire you will need to refer to one of the following center console configurations Super Console For vehicles equipped with the Super Console the spare tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the console Super Console 1 Lower Drawer 2 Front Drawer 3 Front Drawer Liner 1 Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut 578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart Premium Base Cargo Center Console ment Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug if equipped to 3 Remove the liner from the console s storage compart access the winch drive nut ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut j 060641963 Winch Cover Assembly Plug If Equipped 060641962 1 Drive Nut Access Spare Tire Tools The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as sembled into a spare tire hook to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle or a Winch T handle to raise lower the compact
246. e creating your own files the recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192 Kbps and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192 Kbps Variable bit rates are also 420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME supported For both formats the recommended sample rate is either 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz e To change the current file use the DVD player s A button to advance to the next file or the V button to return to the start of the current or previous file To change the current directory use the remote con trol s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind skip back and fast fwd skip forward Disc Errors If the DVD player is unable to read the disc a Disc Error message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is automatically ejected A dirty damaged or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a Disc Error message If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for 2 0 seconds the DVD player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward 1 0 to 3 0 seconds at a time If the end of the disc is reached the DVD player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot conditions such as when the vehicle s interior tempera ture is above 120 F 49 C The Blu ray Player may shut down when the vehicle s interior temperature e
247. e driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of 022607508 n aa Your Vehicle Active Head Restraint AHR Components Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR 1 Head Restraint Front Half 3 Head Restraint Back Half i i m If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision Soft Foam and Trim Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 2 Seatback 4 Head Restraint Guide you must reset the head restraint on the dr
248. e exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 535 WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information 056502429 The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique E 85 Fuel Cap fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 536 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal i
249. e follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 505 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 506 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in overheating and tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them sho
250. e glass select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed Recirculation Recirculation Control Button Push this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle An indicator light will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the outside air position es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445 To prevent fogging when the Recirculation button is pushed and the mode control is set to Panel the A C will engage automatically e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC display along with two t
251. e left 9 Lower the jack to its fully closed position 11 Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism clicks at least three times 590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE Refer to the Spare Tire Tools section for in WARNING structions on assembling the T handle A loose compact spare tire cover assembly thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the com 13 Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place possible Correct the tire pressure as required provided 12 Stow the jack jack handle and winch handle tools back in the stowage compartment Securing The Compact Spare Tire CAUTION 1 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T handle and fit the winch T handle over the drive The winch mechanism is designed for use with the nut Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mecha winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other nism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack power tools is not recommended and can damage the in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out winch from under the vehicle 2 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the spare tire hook and pull the wheel spacer from un
252. e on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed E ES a S 5 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure require ments found on the tire placard label located on the driver s side B Pillar STARTING AND OPERATING 521 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment
253. e progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is cycled to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 e An active call is automatically transferred to the mo bile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using Push the Phone w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is
254. e radio faceplate or push the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod9 USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or push the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or push the VR button and say Previous Track ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 e e e Jump backward in the current track by pushing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pushing and holding the FF gt gt button A single push backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five sec onds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pushing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or push the VR button and s
255. e shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster E STARTING AND OPERATING 473 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury Transmission Gear Position Display 1 Actual Gear s Allowed 1 1 2 1 4 NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking tap the shift lever to the left repeatedly as the vehicle slows The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down 474 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive sixth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e The shift lever is in the DRIVE position The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture The vehicle speed is sufficiently high The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ
256. e strap marked 3 to release the anchors 5 Pull release strap marked 4 and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin Release Strap 3 Release Strap 4 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 3 Pulling strap 4 releases the seatback to return to its full upright position 4 Raise the head restraint to its upright position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are 030936407 fully latched Stowed Third Row Seat e Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its To Unfold Third Row Seats lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision Always make sure the head 1 Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the restraints are in their upright positions when the storage bin and push the seat forward until the seat is to be occupied anchors latch 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tailgate Mode 1 Pull release strap 3 then pull release strap 4 to rotate the entire seat rearward 2 To restore the seat to its upright position lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch WARNING To avoid serious injury or death never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks Retainer hooks which will hold plastic
257. e the TIPM cover correspond to the following table 644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description A 40 Amp Green Power Folding Seat J2 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate Module Ja 30 Amp Pink Rear Door Module J4 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Node J5 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Node J6 40 Amp Green Antilock Brakes Pump Stability Control Sys tem J7 30 Amp Pink i Antilock Brakes Valve Stability Control Sys tem J8 40 Amp Green Power Memory Seat If Equipped J9 40 Amp Green Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor Flex Fuel If Equipped J10 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Wash Manifold Tuning Valve If Equipped ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J11 30 Amp Pink Power Sliding Door Module Anti Theft Mod ule If Equipped J12 30 Amp Pink HVAC Rear Blower Radiator Fan Motor JA3 60 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw IOD Main J14 40 Amp Green Rear Window Defogger J15 40 Amp Green Front Blower J17 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid J18 20 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module Trans Range J19 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan J20 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper LO HI J21 20 Amp Blue Front Rear Washer J22 25 Amp Clear Sunroof Module M1 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp Brake Switch M2 20 Amp Yellow Front Fog Lamps M3 20 Amp Yellow Front Rear Axle Locker Vacuu
258. ealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 513 CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire
259. ear Panel Power Switch Bank 1 Open To Normal 3 Tailgate Fold Flat 2 Stow 4 Right Left Seats Both Seats 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mmm NOTE e Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting to fold stow the power third row seats To abort seat operation while seat is in motion press a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat Once the seat stops moving then the desired position can be selected The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation When the system detects an obstacle the motors will stop and reverse the motion a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle Should this occur remove the obstacle and press the button again for the desired position Manually Folding Third Row Seats If Equipped 1 Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down 2 Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the release strap marked 1 located on the outboard side of the head restraint UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 3 Pull release strap marked 2 located on the rear of the seat to lower the seatback h 030938618 Head Restraint Release Strap 1 030938619 Release Strap 2 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Pull releas
260. ear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold tempera tures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to third gear only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK
261. ear the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the Key Fob When the ignition is in the LOCK OFF key re moval position the transmission is locked in Continued WARNING Continued PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Continued 464 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key rem
262. earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door 508 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses At least once a month e Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1
263. eat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or outboard front passenger s if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unbuckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat
264. echnicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 677 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire
265. ect amp Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names To list the paired mobile phone names using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone w button to begin es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 3 When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced push the Voice Command amp vR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another mobile phone paired with the Uconnect Phone To select another mobile phone using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone w button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also push the Phone w button at any time while the list is being played and choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m th
266. ects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Stationary Objects Overtaking Passing 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their Opposing Traffic vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear ue of the velicie is ae The RCP system will The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver Continued 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 5 k
267. ed tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 499 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means
268. ed by a dimming switch located on the instrument panel refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Located in the back of the super console is a storage drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers 035336460 Super Console 1 Front Sliding Tambour Door 2 Cupholder Light Ring 3 Rear Sliding Tambour Door 035336459 Rear Drawer Storage 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear win dow defroster only when the engine is operating Rear Window Defroster CAUTION ste The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated the heating elements mE outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button Use care when washing the inside of the rear will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the operation press the button a second time heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water NOTE Do not use scrapers sharp instruments
269. eed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer 628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add e
270. eeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not uei 7 ibi determining when your tires should be spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping 516 STARTING AND OPERATING 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bot
271. el than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 680 INDEX MM About Your Brakes llle 482 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 626 Adding Fuel 2a pe Rp eR 539 Adding Washer Fluid inste tatea es aae aas 623 Additives Fuel i4 adc EUR OY 533 ATE Dg isa E dpa Se ae seg ate eee eae dos 80 Air Bag Advance Front Air Bag 6 0 ee esras 80 Air Bag Components sinas erada assas daaa 80 Air bag Operation 6 6 0 0 iaa 83 Air Bag Warning Light 0 91 Driver Knee Air Bag llle 84 Enhanced Accident Response 91 Event Data Recorder EDR 94 Front Air Bag 6 eee 80 If A Deployment Occurs 000 89 Knee Impact Bolsters 00004 84 Maintaining Your Air Bag System 93 Side Air Bags cesse rap ee ae dead ark a 84 Air bag Deployment lille 80 Aur bag Lights Ses aere Eas Godage nent eh RR 91 Air bag Maintenance llle 93 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 615 Air Conditioner Maintenance 6 620 Air Conditioning s s srai a aaa me eee eee 432 Air Conditioning Controls 00 432 Air Conditioning F
272. el 8 Setting the rating to Level 1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc Not all DVD discs encode a Rating so it is still possible that discs designed for adult audiences can still play without requiring a password The default rating is Level 8 play all discs without a password and the default password is 0000 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423 Please input a 4 digit password B x Sel ENTER Carel RETURN DVD Password Entry 424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME To set the password activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions e Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but tons select the Rating tab Highlight Change Password and then push the remote control s ENTER OK button Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then push the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits e After the four digit password is entered push the remote control s ENTER OK button If the password is correct the set password screen is displayed Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and the remote control s Right cursor button to select digits enter the new password After the four digit password is entered push the
273. ella Holder The driver s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into models and an optional secondary mesh pocket the left front door entry scuff molding 035207035 Driver s Seatback Storage Umbrella Holder 1 Bag Holder 2 Standard Pocket 3 Mesh Pocket es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 Second Row Seat Storage Bins If Equipped The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of the second row seats The area below the covers can be used for storage when the second row seat is in the upright position Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Lock position to allow greater access to the storage bin 035205617 Storage Bin CAUTION NOTE The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING In a collision serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down Storage Bin Safety Warning Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle
274. elts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of Child restraint anchorages are designed to with the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with Stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted the child restraint installation instead of buckling it child restraints Under no circumstances are they to behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock attaching other temis or equipment to the vehicle the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the rear passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both
275. emperatures for the driver and front passenger The system will then automati cally regulate the amount of airflow 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver passenger and rear temperatures Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automati cally maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE It is not necessary to move the temperature settings The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain 446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL on low until the engine warms up The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected or by chang ing the front blower knob setting Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when t
276. en must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e Side Air Bags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions Side Air Bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Side Impacts In side impacts the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection In side impacts the Side Air Bags deploy independently a left side impact ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
277. en you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Auto Up Reset If Equipped To reactivate the Auto Up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch If Equipped Second row passengers may open and close the sliding door window by a single switch on the door handle assembly The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay
278. ence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can push the Voice Command EVR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then push the Voice Command amp vR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associ ated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could push the Voice Command amp vRbutton and say Pair a Phone to select that
279. ent feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demon strate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface
280. entries cannot be deleted or edited es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 To edit a Uconnect Phonebook entry using Voice Com mand 1 Push the Phone w button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit 3 Select the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit 4 When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is only recommended when the vehicle is not in motion ONLY the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To delete a Uconnect Phonebook Entry using Voice 4 After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will Command ask you which des
281. er can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle e Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued CAUTION Continued Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water in
282. er voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you push the Voice Command vr button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists options push the Voice Command amp vRbutton listen for the beep and say your command Pushing the Voice Command EvR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 The system will best recognize your speech if the
283. erating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator 630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e e Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
284. eric llle Using HomeLink 040 264 Sunroof Maintenances se seoa tesa saaa kea 269 DOCULILY riea a y E eE A opes 264 Ignition Off Operation s s croci c erreser 269 Troubleshooting Tips 0 265 WM ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF General Information 266 OILED dati Sed RN PEELS 2 E POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 266 E POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED 274 Opening Sunroof Express sss 267 Bg CUPHOLDERS s dau P RE4R REG I PRESA 276 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 267 Instrument Panel Cupholders 276 Closing Sunroof Express 267 Super Console TUBQIIp Beds y raay atte m 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Premium Console Cupholders If Equipped 278 Interior Bottle Holders 278 Smoker s Package Kit If Equipped 279 STORAGE oii aka Meee toa ie tee eee 280 Glove Compartments 4 280 Door Trim Panel Storage 281 Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped 282 Umbrella Holder 04 282 Second Row Seat Storage Bins If Equipped 283 Storage Bin Safety Warning 284 Coat Hooks Cargo Area Storage ll CONSOLE FEATURES Basic Console Premium Console If Equipped Super Console If Equipped REAR WINDOW FEATU
285. erly tight ened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test For states that require an Inspection and Mainte 610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to star
286. erse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Manufactured under license under U S Patent s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 487 535 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued amp pending DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos Symbol and DTS 2 0 Channel are trademarks of DTS Inc 1996 2007 DTS Inc All Rights Reserved e Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video format created by DivX LLC a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit divx com for more information and soft ware tools to convert your files into DivX videos ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certi fied device must be registered in order to play pur chased DivX Video on Demand VOD movies To obtain your registration code locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu Go to vod divx com for more information on how to complete your registration DivXG DivX Certified and associated logos are trade marks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429 Trademark STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF e Blu ray Disc Blu ray and the logos are trademarks hiss of the Blu ray Disc Association e Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and or its affiliates v
287. erving Fuel 4 as ie scs son eae HE Se da 336 Consoles ea vo vues Eh eme Uem qu 287 Console Foor 4 2 dre we Res 287 Console Overhead leen 253 Console Removable 000000000 291 Contract Service eee 673 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 628 Cooling System ix sre et e Rendre RR ded 624 Adding Coolant Antifreeze sss 626 Coolant Capacity 0 eee eee 656 Coolant Leyels sita inne RR tee ds 625 Disposal of Used Coolant sss 629 Drain Flush and Refill Lun 625 Insp cuOn cies codecs Hee dee ek eee ds 629 Points to Remember 0000000 629 Pressure Cap i ses e e es 628 Radiator Cap si beaga galg eee 628 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 626 Corrosion Protection 0 0 0 00 eee 634 Cupholders iere e bod Ae 276 684 INDEX MM Customer Assistance 0 0 0 0 eee ees 671 Data Recorder Event 0 000 eee eee ae 94 Daytime Running Lights 0 225 Dealer Services 2s soupe b Rede exis 611 Defroster Windshield 0 00005 122 Delay Intermittent Wipers 0 232 Diagnostic System Onboard 608 Dimmer Control seses cde cue awa eared 226 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission less 634 Oil Engine c 2a eee eee rires e RR 613 Power Steering nens riase t auria eaa 478 Disabled Vehicle Towing lille 601 Disposal Ant
288. es Per Gallon MPG or L 100 km 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY o Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset The N 72 Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the Fuel Economy prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button When the fuel economy is reset the display will read zero for two OTE LOW FUEL seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel aver mono age reading before the reset 1 Ori Average Fuel Economy Display Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Miles Per Gallon MPG This display shows t
289. esigned specifically to stow a compact spare tire only Do not attempt to use the winch to stow the full size deflated tire or any other full size tire as the tire may not be held securely Vehicle damage may result Road Tire Installation 060503827 Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 2 Valve Notch 5 Mounting Stud 2 To ease the installation process for steel wheels with 5 Wheel Lug Nut wheel covers install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593 snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for proper wheel lug nut torqu
290. ety Checks Inside Vehicle LL 122 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 124 Safety Defects Reporting llle 675 Safety Exhaust Gas llle 121 Safety Information Tire 00 494 Safety ipsus vss pee aq eS Ea EN P ees 4 120 Satellite Radio Antenna lille 373 Schedule Maintenance lesen 662 Seat Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 70 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 73 Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode 75 Energy Management Feature 73 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 75 Lap Shoulder Belt Operation 62 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0000008 59 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 70 Pregnant Women 0009404 eae Gada ete eda 72 Seat Belt Extender pas cies hele goed woe 71 Seat Belt Pretensioner 0000005 72 Seat Belt Reminder 0000 58 Seat Belt Maintenance s spi sarene nea a 640 Seat Belt R mindef c sco ccrsrierereria srin 58 Seat Belts pciagaer anise ctesereee ni d ria 58 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 0 70 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 70 Child Restraint 6 0 0 0 00 00 0000 00008 95 Extender 4 2 sss eR ieni HERE e Rs 7 Front Seat ae kr o x drei 58 Inspection usc viles ace c RO as RETI EA Oe 122 Operating Instructions 62 Pregnant Women 4 dg RR pasas tas 72 ee INDEX 695 Pretensioners m cacan imes
291. events you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the Key Fob A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Driver Power Door Lock Switches 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Front Passenger Power Door Switches 1 Window Open Close 2 Power Door Locks If you push the power door lock switch while the sliding door is open the sliding door will lock Automatic Door Locks If Equipped When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit If Equipped The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened This will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven the shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors closed The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks lock or unlock ee THINGS TO KNOW B
292. ezing the winch retaining tabs together Push the retainer through the spare tire to release it from the wheel 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn OFF the ignition 060536170 Removing Wheel Spacer WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally WARNING Continued opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front Always park on a firm level surface as far from the tire block the left rear wheel edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic when the vehicle is being jacked transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on
293. f the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately
294. f the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING The Electronic Stability Control System ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents Continued 488 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC Off switch is located in the center switch bank next to the hazard flasher switch ESC On This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This
295. f the way and releasing ee f To return to the full open position the door must first be positioned for conversation mirror use closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to release 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Courtesy Reading Lights If Equipped The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry RKE the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press the lens a second time to turn each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional Reading Lights arrows Rear Overhead Consoles If Equipped The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions with or without sunroof An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines down on the front foot well area while in courtesy mode for added convenience 033302314 Overhead Compartment Features 1 LCD Screen 2 Rear HVAC 3 Interior Lights 4 Storage If equipped otherwise stor age 5 Storage 6 LCD Screen 7 Interior Lights 8 Halo Lighting UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
296. feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Automatic High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM
297. ffering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision e Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 547 Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing
298. flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value as shown in the Inflate Tire to XX message NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this infor mation SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which TPMS Sensor s is not being received 528 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will
299. format types Program Type play 16 Digit Character Dis Oldies Oldies Program Type play Personality Persnlty No program type or un None Public Public defined Rhythm and Blues R amp B Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Music Rel Musc Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Information hom Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items Set Clock Pushing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours push the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL con trol knob Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM
300. g Key Fob From Ignition 14 Tamper Alert o eg x nyte ead cers 19 Key In Ignition Reminder 15 Security System Manual Override 19 M SENTRY KEY 000000020 15 B ILLUMINATED ENTRY 19 Replacement Keys 000005 16 B REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 20 Customer Key Programming 17 Using The RKE Transmitter 21 D General Information 00 17 H Power Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped metet ara tense E ee dose 25 E VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 17 Programming Additional Transmitters 27 Transmitter Battery Replacement 28 General Information seas cessione snt nimh 30 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 30 How To Use Remote Start anaa aana 31 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped 32 To Enter Remote Start Mode 32 To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start 33 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicles aeee prania tsr ere wae maw eas 33 Cancel Remote Start llle 34 To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start Mode x hoe ens Sig rs ere errs ES EE 34 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME When To Reset Remote Start 34 DOOR
301. g the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pushing the button located on the overhead console 022202256 Overhead Console Master Power Switch 1 Left Sliding Door 3 Right Sliding Door 2 Liftgate 4 Power Switch 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening liftgate is opening or closing Pushing once will only close the liftgate This button cannot be used to open the liftgate WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away NOTE e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position Rear Power Liftgate Switch When the RKE transmitter button is pushed and the Flash Lights feature is enabled the tail lights will flash en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e e During power operat
302. geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out any residual water 624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid Cooling System when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan Commercially available windshield washer solvents disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution You or others can be badly burned by hot engine After the engine has warmed operate the defroster for a coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or you see or hear steam coming from under the hood freezing the fluid on the cold windshield MOPAR All d
303. gin automati cally after the Blu ray is recognized by the disc drive If playback does not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into the Blu ray Player push the play button If playback does not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into Blu ray VES disc Player follow these steps Using The Touchscreen Radio e Push the MENU button on the faceplate then press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen If a chapter list es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 appears on the right side of the screen press the hide list button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES control screen e Press the 1 button on the touchscreen to select an audio channel then press the VES Disc button on the touchscreen in the media column Using The Remote Control e Select an audio channel Channel 1 for 2nd row screen and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen then push the source key and select VES Disc from the menu Push popup menu key to navigate disc menu and options NOTE e Due to the size of the content on a Blu ray Disc the disc may not start playing immediately Not all Blu ray CD or DVD discs will automatically restart from where you left off at when turned off Some discs will restart from the beginning others will restart from where you left off at and some will ask you if you would like to continue or start from the beginning Play Video Games Connect the video game console to th
304. grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be programmed to recall the driver s seat outside mirrors adjustable brake and accelerator pedals if equipped and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN LOCK button is pressed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 Programming The Memory Feature faa NOTE To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie driver s seat outside mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch Driver Memory Switch Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE transmitters one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions 4 Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but
305. grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver s side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 WARNING e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or n
306. h time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily push and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pushing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pushing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps Fuel Economy Push and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the SELECT button The following Fuel Economy functions display in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy AVG e Distance To Empty DTE e Mil
307. h Steer ing Wheel M21 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain M22 10 Amp Red Horn 648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M23 10 Amp Red Horn M24 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper M25 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Diesel Lift Pump If Equipped M26 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch Driver Window Switch ule M28 10 Amp Red Powertrain Transmission Control Module M29 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module M30 15 Amp Blue Rear Wiper Module Power Folding Mirror M31 20 Amp Yellow Back Up Lamps M32 10 Amp Red Airbag Module THATCHUM If Equipped M33 10 Amp Red Powertrain ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M34 10 Amp Red Park Assist Heater Climate Control Module Headlamp Wash Compass Rear Camera Door Lamps Flashlight Relay Diesel Cabin Heater Rad Fan Diesel If Equipped M35 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors M36 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 3 Instrument Panel or with Console Center M37 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes Stability Control Stop Lamp Fuel Pump M38 25 Amp Clear Door Lock Unlock Motors Liftgate Lock Unlock Motors The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module 650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
308. h the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Push and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Reverse button operates in a similar manner AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Push this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file
309. h to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel operation 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System off turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O OFF position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the Automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers If Equipped When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the engine is running the headlights will automatically turn on when the wiper system is also turned on Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system NOTE The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Delay If Equipped This feature provides the safety of he
310. has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for safety information or assistance 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the device Power Sunroof Switch The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 WARNING Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and
311. he indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the Homelink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Non Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained
312. he instantaneous MPG in bar graph form while driving This will monitor the gas mileage in real time as you drive and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Vehicle Speed Push and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the RIGHT arrow button Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pushing the RIGHT arrow button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Push and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info is highlighted in the EVIC and push the SELECT button Push and release the UP DOWN buttons to highlight one of the following functions if you want to reset it Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset A Trip Function Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected highlighted Push and hold the SELECT button to clear the resettable function being displa
313. he mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 Rear Wiper And Washer Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the rear intermittent wipers To activate the washers rotate the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray until the ring is released and then resume the intermit tent interval NOTE Rear window wipers function in the intermittent wiper speed only Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity If the opera tor desires more wiping sensitivity they may select sensitivity positions 4 or 5 If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1 Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
314. he remote control s navi gation buttons A V to select an item then press the remote control s navigation buttons E lt to change the value for the currently selected item To reset all values back to the original settings select the Default Settings menu option and press the remote control s ENTER OK button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415 Disc Features control the remote DVD Blu ray Disc Player s if equipped settings of DVD being watched in the remote player Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed 1 Set the audio to the desired source and channel 2 Close the video screen 3 To change the current audio mode push the remote control s MODE button This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the MODE SOURCE Select menu If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard verify that the headphones are turned on the ON indicator is illuminated and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel If the headphones are turned on push the remote control s power button to turn audio on If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones Disc Formats The DVD player is capable of playing the following types of discs 12 cm or 8 cm diameter e DVD Video discs MPEG 2 video compression see m notes about DVD Region Codes e DVD Audio disc
315. he system is being used in the manual mode Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Front ATC Panel The Three Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel To change the rear system settings e Push REAR button to change control to rear control mode Rear display below will appear Control func tions now operate rear system e To return to Front screen push REAR button again or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds 1901 AUTO Ao REAR C nil 045641992 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display 1 Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447 2 Rear Temperature Display Bi Level Mode This display shows the temperature setting for the rear Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the seat occupants floor outlets 3 Blower Control Display NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 4 Rear Auto Indicat ear Auto Indicator Floor Mode This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode This display shows the current Blower speed selection af Air comes from the floor outlets Rear Mode Control Headliner Mode Rear Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each The rear ATC system has floor air
316. her Channel HDD Ves AUX1 B Weather Channel On Screen Disp eater Mother Nature View 12 00 Enter to Select rg Picture Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen Audio Control RS 4 vile 010107721 Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 3 Press the 1 button on the touchscreen and then press either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES column depend ing which AUX input is used To exit press the back arrow button at the top of the touchscreen Rear VES Controls Ves HDD DISC AJA AUX 1 AUX AUX2 LO Mgr Em FM Rov 12 00 Lock Select Channel Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES Column Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control 1 Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen 2 While looking at the video screen either push Up Down Left Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly push the SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls 1 2 Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to
317. hind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door and you could be injured If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save l
318. hown LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position do not use that outboard position If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt do not install a child seat in that outboard position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 1 Loosen the adjusters on the lower st
319. ic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section 7 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 8 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped i Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should
320. ice contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 674 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive har
321. icle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer sys tem serviced bring al
322. ide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gage even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light 524 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Basic TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e TPMS Telltale Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure Warnings Q LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the instr
323. idents visit UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if Ro equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone w button and Voice Com mand EV
324. ifreeze Engine Coolant iles 629 Door Locks Door Locks 2 2522 dem ES Ae dr om x ws 35 R mote ia 3 a do ace eme aD d Le 35 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 35 Door Opener Garage 6 6 ee 257 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Waters 6 tniciais ns oid ake eee de aa a dogs 476 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 336 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 383 04 PL 535 Economy Fuel Mode 000 464 Electrical Power Outlets llle 270 Electric Remote Mirrors 0 000 133 Electronic Brake Control System 482 Brake Assist System 00000000 486 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 237 Electronic Stability Control ESC 487 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 324 ee INDEX 685 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 561 Jacking 154 p24 gorede Se RR ERE a 575 Jump Starting ic aoc seh pae RESP i gne ad 594 Overheating sebene Sate sieht ings CER ees 561 Emission Control System Maintenance 609 Engine Air Cleaner i222 Mee cee pene a Y 615 Block Heater sasan eee ee wm cd aie a 462 Break In Recommendations 119 Checking Oil Level 1 2 0 00 nairde nna 613 Compartment m simtos snydes eee 607 Compartment Identification 0 607 Coolant Antifreeze 2 0 0 2 0 eee 625 COONS ess eben ne
325. ign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 15 mph 24 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph 24 km h the warning light will not illuminate Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h 0304052890 Rear Monitoring 0304052892 Overtaking Approaching UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of obj
326. ignation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE 1 Push the Phone w button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete 3 After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish e ONLY the phonebook in the current language is de to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook leted entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list push the Voice Command VeVRbutton To delete or erase all Uconnect phonebook entries using while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired Voice Command oky and say Delecta 1 Push the Phone w button to begin e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook 3 After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names In The Uconnect amp Phonebook To list ALL names in the Uconnect Phonebook using voice Command 1 Push the Phone w button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and
327. il indicator system turns on efer to the maintenance schedules o wag page for the required maintenance intervals e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and fill as needed e Check function of all interior and exterior lights At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System e Change oil and filter e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake M A N T E N A N C E S ie H E D U L E S 8 e Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions 664 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Maintenance Chart Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A l N T E N A i i e e e e e e N Mileage or time passed 9o gs2s8 sg S 2 S S S e S S 3 Cc whichever comes first o 29 9 19 Q eo eo eo T T 5 E 8 amp 8 8 9 8 8 88 S 2 8 8 9 S Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 C OrKilometers o o o o o 2 e e Q H s s s s s es 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 E 8ls 3 8 2 8 3 8 E 8 R amp R S Y Additional Inspections 3a Inspe
328. ile the vehicle is parked Serious The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward seat belt the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release Do not ride with the seatback reclined s9 that the the switch when the desired position is reached shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar The power A lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the er power seat Push the switch forward to increase the NC DESSINS lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING Continued On some models the front and rear seats may be Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion seat ba
329. ill assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or ee STARTING AND OPERATING 545 rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the traile
330. ill be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense Sys tem Usage Precautions in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only
331. ilter lille 452 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 451 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 200 437 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 620 Air Conditioning System l l 432 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 432 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 ee ee 507 Alarm Light 6 eee 318 Alarm Security Alarm lesse 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio lisse 373 Antifreeze Engine Coolant lisse 626 en INDEX 681 Disposal 43e cesa Rem Ro er ed 629 Anti Lock Warning Light se cpe seres rnanis 313 Appearance Care s l c s ee o enn 634 Ashtray cac serit artes eed in es diner pe nare siis 279 Assistance TOWING s 2 00 cscs ek s Edo ere 160 Assist HillStart llle 491 Auto Down Power Windows lees 42 Automatic Dimming Mirror 0 132 Automatic Door Locks 0 000 000 eee 38 Automatic Headlights liliis 224 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 440 Automatic Transmission 00 00008 462 Adding Fluid 6ce asint assia mns 634 Fluid and Filter Changes llis 634 Fluid Change 26226 Rc e deg agar 634 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 ee eee 634 FIG Type rink osten caret nine acd ae tent 633 Gear Ranges 2428 cde eb nek hee d 466 Special Additives Torque Converter se ex dem reme ts 474 Auto Up Power Windows
332. iminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped 432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System If Equipped The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions With the Three Zone Temperature Control system each front seat occupant can independently control the Heat ing Ventilation and Air Conditioning o
333. in a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date an
334. in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console for the driver and passengers Pushing the switch once will open the power sliding door If the switch is pushed while the door is under a power cycle the door will reverse direction NOTE The power sliding side door must be unlocked before the power sliding door switches will operate Power Sliding Door Switch If the inside or outside door handles are used while the power sliding side door is activated the power sliding door feature will be canceled and will go into manual mode es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats push the power sliding door master lock button located in the overhead console to disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen gers NOTE e e The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h To close the power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph 0 km h the brake must be pushed If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or close position it will fully open when a
335. indow defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435 NOTE CAUTION Continued Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pushing the rear window defroster switch a i window cleaners on the interior surface of the second time window e To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear Keep all objects a safe distance from the window window defroster only when the engine is operating 9 Recirculation Control Button m Push this button to choose between outside air i intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle An indicator light will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued 436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE e If the Recirculation button is pushed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator wi
336. ing 0 4 460 Floor Console 0 0 es 287 Fluid Capacities 2a es eco Roe eee 656 Fluid Leaks 22r wee ira P UU Ea ne an d 124 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 634 Brake y aa nte d entire tee ante oC S Pd 631 Cooling System 240620004 e mita nerit 625 Power Steering i ane acd E Ren eed 478 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 657 FOS l ghit edes aer hah tere Ra des 226 Fog Light Service eee eee 653 Fold in Floor Stow n Go Seating 197 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle lessen 598 Fuel ssh ay 4 Oe Rha em RES MO ee TG 530 Additig steer eee ern eat eee dea ges 539 Additv S ccs oa yr eee eS 533 Clean Alt 660 Gane ani ab we eas ae a aN 531 Conserving gt ccs se e e e es 336 Economy Mode 006 0 e cece eee 464 Ethanol ssim e BS Oa ex Rea i 531 Filler Cap Gas Cap lesen 317 Filler Door Gas Cap sssssssssss 317 Gasoline s sis ac dea dU amp nbus alk Eanes 530 ecu 317 Eight c sao as s ea ie calle eee cane tka ere ee TS 321 Materials Added 0 0 00 e eee eee 533 Methanol llle 531 Octane Rating ioca vane ek X eb 3b aane 530 Requirements iade a edes Va as 530 Saver Mode 0 00 336 Tank Capacity scusa pee eed ers 656 Fuel Flexible i dpe dE EX ATE OR EAS 535 Fu ling e cerrada esae mee ee Edeka en 539 Fuel Optimizee i aces hasmi dag ee egos 336 Fuel Sayer secesi s
337. ing faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if the ESC is in the Partial Off mode The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS is active If the indicator light flashes during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESC or TCS 486 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydro planing e The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Brake Assist System BAS The Brake Assist System BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency brak ing maneuvers The system detects an emergency brak ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can he
338. ing the SET S button and within 10 seconds followed by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver s door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat and the pedals if equipped stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected NOTE Pressing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the memory mirror recall Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm re
339. inges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623 components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on
340. ins on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING
341. inst op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears stamped on the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle regis tration and title Vehicle Identification Number 010834813 INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS es AM Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 2 ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 Rearming Of The System 0 17 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 To Arm The System 00000005 18 Key Pob neu de ang eo cte hee oa eae aes 13 To Disarm The System llle ss 18 Removin
342. inst the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly 1
343. intaining Your Vehicle 120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people should be considered a normal part of the break in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously not interpreted as a problem injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFETY TIES vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with the trunk liftga
344. io modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode 412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Information Mode Display 0448005995 Information Mode Video Screen Display 1 Channel 1 Mode 2 Channel 1 Shared Status 3 Channel 1 Audio Only Mute 4 Channel 2 Mode 5 Channel 2 Shared Status 6 Channel 2 Audio Only Mute 7 Channel 1 ENTER OK Button Action 8 Channel 2 ENTER OK Button Action 9 Clock 10 Video Lock 11 Not Available Error Numeric Keypad Menu EH Input File L2 IE S tk 244 wel 6 9 WEATHER Preset 10 WEATHER 1 4 5 8 B Weather Channel Del 12 00 The Weather Channel Mother Nature 3 7 0 Go 044874308 Numeric Keypad Menu When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE pushing the remote control s OK button activates a numeric keypad menu This screen en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413 makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency satellite channel or track number To enter the desired digit 1 Push the remote control s navigation buttons A V lt to navigate to the desired digit 2 When the digit is highlighted push the remote con trol s ENTER OK button to select the digit Repeat these steps until all digits are entered 3 To delete the last digit navigate to the Del button and push the remote control s ENTE
345. ion 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort stowed position in the left rear side of the headliner able and not resting on your neck The retractor will slightly behind the third row seat withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt 6 To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Third Row Center Belt Operating Instructions The third row center seat belt features a seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and seat belt can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience Mini Latch Stowage en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 0226046087 Mini Latch Stowage Buckle Location 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Connect Mini Latch To Buckle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE m Detaching Mini Latch And Buckle Detaching Mini Latch And Buckle 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the seat belt over
346. ion B Stow n Go Seating If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the i second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage A N 030907490 Second Row Stow n Go Push Button Head Restraints Second Row Bench On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seats the seats will fold and tumble in one motion If your vehicle is equipped with a second row bench seat 1 Move the front seat fully forward the head restraints are not adjustable 2 Recline the front seatback fully forward 3 Raise the armrests on the second row seat 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the 5 Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on armrests are raised the outboard side of the seat 4 Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the LOCK position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover f LOCK POSITION 030938623 Seatback Recliner Lever Seat Tumble And Head Restraint Fold Lever The non adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold automatically during the seat tumble No additional actuation is necessary Storage Bin Cover Lock Release UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 030938625 Non Adjustable Head Restraint Automatic Folding Seatback The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy storage 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
347. ion Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HIGH to LOW indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes Manual Front Second Row Seat Adjuster Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat y eJ 030905616 Manual Seat Adjuster While sitting in the seat pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped For models equipped with manual reclining seats the recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat o m c r A
348. ion whether liftgate is fully open or fully closed the liftgate chime will beep several times indicating power operation is in progress The power liftgate must be in the full open or close positions for any of the buttons to operate If the liftgate is not in the full open or close positions it must be opened or closed manually If the liftgate release button is activated while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 12 F 24 C or temperatures above 143 F 62 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate buttons e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions ome within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Gas props sup
349. ird row seating positions The coat hook load limit is 10 lbs 4 5 kg Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle Cargo Area Storage The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement Load To This Line This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing 035235765 EE Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit NOTE With all rear seats stowed or removed 4 x 8 foot sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 CONSOLE FEATURES The cupholders are removable to access a large storage There are three consoles available Basic Premium and bin Super e The basic console is removable from the vehicle for additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at WARNING the console base E Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart To Remove The Basic Floor Console ment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision 2 Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook 1 Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip Basic Console 3 Remove the console Basic Console features consist of the following To Reinstall The Basic F
350. irno be eR EG LEY GRO ea ds 336 Fusese meque edo ae ied aoe Ba a ue a ud 642 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 257 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 0 0 0 00 0 539 Gasoline Clean Air llle 531 Gasoline Fuel 0 00 00 eee eee eee 530 Conse rving 4 x pacer eed pucr s dier ae as 336 Gasoline Reformulated 0 0005 531 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle 321 Feliu ut eaa a qc db aires Real ded 317 Speedometer ciis de oe Rep eben 317 Tachometer llle 310 Gear Ranges ec s RR Rh EP IY deeded 466 Gear Select Lever Override lusu 599 General Information 00 00 ee ee 177 Glass Clear ng ias sd acy ne ae nag eds e gas 639 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 542 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 541 GVW Row arar Bl dex a anb Rer cbe Au 541 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Stand ing Water sce nae bo ae ee dom e RR T ae 476 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 561 688 INDEX eee Headlights Bulb Replacement Cleaning Lights On Reminder Passing Replacing Time Delay Washers Head Restraints Heated Mirrors Heater Engine Block High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch Hill Start Assist 2 ee ee Hitches Trailer Towing HomeLink Garage Door Opener Hood Release Hook Coats asa acd Fal ene eg irte he E Sg 286 Ignitiorti i59 i2244 ey LEA boe Glen es She DA 14 Key i i hehe h
351. is only recommended when the vehicle is not in motion 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To add names to the Uconnect Phonebook using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone w button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry 3 When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob 4 When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired 5 When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Edit Uconnect amp Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is only recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook
352. is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be descri
353. is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones Blu ray VES Headphones 1 Power Button 2 Volume Control 3 Channel Selection Switch 0448003394 408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM Controls The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup NOTE The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones To conserve battery life the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones 1 Ensure the Remote Control channel screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch NOTE e When both switches are on Channel 1 the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 1 e When both switches are on Channel 2 the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 2 Push the SOURCE button on the remote control If the video screen is displaying a video source such as a DVD Video pressing DISPLAY shows the status on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next mode When the mode is in an audio only source such as FM the Mode Selection menu appears on screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409 4 When the Mode
354. is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward seat belt The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will shoulder belt is no longer resting against your move in the direction of the switch Release the switch chest In a collision you could slide under the seat when the desired position has been reached belt which could result in serious injury or death Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tilting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat Reclining The Seatback belts and wh
355. ith the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle Push and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then Push and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button Release both buttons at the same time Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by Push ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE
356. ith the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC ee system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off 12 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 13 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 14 Fuel Gauge lt The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 15 Air Bag Warning Light NOTE Q This light will turn on for four to eight seconds You must apply
357. ition and release it as Continued 460 STARTING AND OPERATING Se soon as the starter engages The starter motor will If The Engine Fails To Start continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running WARNING 3 If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage e Never pour fuel Or other flammable liquids into automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure causing serious personal injury Steps 1 3 above Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel pressed to shift out of PARK could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C and vehicle To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended Continued E STARTING AND OPERATING 461 WARNING Continued e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
358. ition will select the highest available transmis sion gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK wi
359. itional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee present the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods e Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pushing
360. iver s and Tubes front passenger s seat before driving You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 0226048657 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 e 0226048658 Review Table Below AHR In Reset Position A Downward Movement NOTE P TR cdd els e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active C Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism j Head Restraints see an authorized dealer 022607494 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag dealer system components e e e e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light Af Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee
361. ives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger if equipped with out board front passenger BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 MPH 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 MPH 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The outboard front passenger s
362. l vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks power sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals for the first three minutes the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash Rearming Of The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 add
363. lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly See your authorized dealer 1 Using a small screwdriver press inward the locking tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal 2 Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly and pull the bulb out to remove 3 Push the bulb into the socket twist the socket into the lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure pe 7 656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 20 Gallons 76 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certi 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters fied Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent meet ing the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level Add 2 9 Qts 2 8 L if equipped with a rear heater es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Ye
364. lb out Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 3 Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the housing bulb with rubbing alcohol Fog Lamps 2 Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb NOTE Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the fascia On the left rear side of the fascia remove the push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam 3 Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog W4 lamp until it locks into place 654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Backup Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two screws from the inboard side Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to disengage the two ball studs 073310812 Tail Lamp Assembly Screws ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655 NOTE e If a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is License Lamp The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to bar and above the license plate scratch the paint e The PRY location is best closest to the studs while dislodging them separately 3 Twist the socket and remove from the
365. ld be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639 CAUTION Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Do not use power washers to clean the inside of the vehicle plastic parts can be permanently damaged and the amount of water can cause problems with the electrical components of your vehicle Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break age than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cautio
366. le Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip e Check engine oil level e Check windshield washer fluid level ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 663 e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Required Maintenance Intervals damage Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear 2 aA Ref h intenan hedul n the followi even if it occurs before the o
367. le up several inches centimeters 1 Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the console 3 Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console 1 Position the console at a slight angle rear slightly higher than the front 2 Slide the console forward into the floor bracket 3 Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting on the floor bracket Console Position 4 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated in the rear floor bracket 5 Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched 035336458 Super Console If Equipped F L Pass Th h The Super Console contains multiple storage areas front E lower pass through top forward bin top rearward bin and rear pull out drawer The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing down on the finger tabs and sliding the door The front tambour door slides forward the rear tambour door The super console contains a pass through storage area slides rearward accessible for both the driver and front passenger UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 NOTE The front cupholder light ring and pass through lighting is controll
368. lecting a track push the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level guidelines menu of the iPod or external USB device Placing items on the iPod or external USB device e Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item or connections to the iPod or external USB device to be selected and push the TUNE control knob This in the vehicle can cause damage to the device will display the next sub menu list item on the audio and or to the connectors device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod 9 or external USB device WARNING sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further information on Bluetooth connectivity Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To enter BISA mode push either AUX button on the radio or push the VR i vRbutton and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music ove
369. ler Group LLC Customer Center 672 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 675 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 672 H In Canada sec e eR a aed 675 In Mexico Contact sess 673 Wi PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 676 ra 670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades cee ta are oea a 00000 677 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 677 Tieadweat 2e bonae r aaa 677 Temperature Grades 0000 678 ee YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obta
370. les and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference 530 STARTING AND OPERATING xe e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses MRXMERCTX1 2546A MERCTX1 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso a line having an octane rating of 87 The use RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING T An METHOD of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these en gines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehi
371. ll flash three times to indicate Recircula tion mode is not allowed Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended n cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the outside air position n order to prevent fogging when the Recirculation button is pushed and the mode control is set to Panel the A C will engage automatically The A C can be deselected manually without dis turbing the mode control selection 10 Air Conditioning AIC Button A C Push and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 11 Floor Mode Button e ug Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side win dow demist outlets es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437 12 Bi Level Mode Button gt e ad NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions
372. llision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light e he light should come on and remain on for ry four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from m
373. loor Console The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to u easily pass through the first row to the second 1 Position the console at a slight angle front slightly higher than the rear Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage cups or 20 oz 6 L plastic bottles Cupholders are 2 Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket dishwasher safe for cleaning hook 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole Premium Console If Equipped eo ene wane The three compartment console with sliding storage bin 4 Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage ward on the console with slight pressure reinstall the bin offers multiple configurations cover plug Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean 5 Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched ing The cupholders can accept plastic bottles large cups or mugs with handles WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the Top tray storage Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs removable floor console is not properly installed or other items Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched Large console center storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
374. lower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are seven blower speeds 434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 Rear Temperature Control If Equipped Provides temperature control for the rear cabin Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear cabin 5 Right Front Temperature Control Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 6 Mix Mode D Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield 7 Front Defrost Mode HV Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor may operate in Mix and Defrost even if the A C button is not pushed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 8 Electronic Rear Window Defrost Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear w
375. lowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 5 Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Canadian Gate Operator To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink amp To operate push and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc
376. lp reduce braking distances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 487 WARNING Continued e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC The Electronic Stability Control ESC enhances direc tional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path o
377. lt damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the vehicle with the discharged Jump Starting Procedure battery 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper WARNING cable to the positive post of the booster battery Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the result in personal injury or property damage due to negative post of the booster battery battery explosion 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597 the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery Disconnecting The Jumper Cables a 1 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis WARNING charged battery Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative 5 Disconnect the opposite end of the negative jumper post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cable from the negative post of the booster battery cal spark could cause the battery to explode and u could result in personal injury Only use the specific 3 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable ground point do not use any other exposed metal from the positive post of the booster battery
378. luminated ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And 5 When in Partial Off mode the engine power ESC OFF Indicator Light reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator tem is reduced Light in the instrument cluster will come on e Trailer Sway Control TSC is disabled when the ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON ESC system is in the Partial Off mode position It should turn off with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this 490 STARTING AND OPERATING light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditi
379. ly when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position and during power acces sory delay Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Window Switch There is a single switch on the front passenger s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors The 1 Window Open Close 2 Power Door Locks Front Passenger Power Door Switches 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Auto Down Feature If Equipped The front window switches may be equipped with an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way push the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes depending on the accessory delay setting after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped The front driver and front passenger switches may be equipped with an Auto Up feature Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release wh
380. m ing and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect amp Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is 3 connected to Uconnect amp Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message 1 Push the Phone button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message 1 Push the Phone button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message 3 You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message push the Voice Command Sve but ton while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Where are you 4 I need more direction 5 LOL 6 Why 7 I love you 8 Call me 9 Call me later 10 Thanks 11 See You in 15 minutes 12 Iam on my way 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
381. m In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 675 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Admin istrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue
382. m Pump Motor 646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M4 10 Amp Red Trailer Tow M5 25 Amp Clear Inverter M6 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 1 ACC Rain Sensor Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with Console Rear M7 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 2 BATT ACC SELECT Cen ter Seat or with Console Rear M8 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat If Equipped M9 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat If Equipped M10 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw Video System Satellite Radio DVD Hands Free Module Universal Garage Door Opener Vanity Lamp Streaming Video Module If Equipped M11 10 Amp Red Climate Control System M12 30 Amp Green Amplifier Radio ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M13 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Cluster SIREN Clock Module Multi Function Control Switch If Equipped M14 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow If Equipped M15 20 Amp Yellow Rear View Mirror Instrument Cluster Multi Function Control Switch Tire Pressure Moni tor Glow Plug Module If Equipped M16 i 10 Amp Red Airbag Module Occupant Classification Mod ule M17 15 Amp Blue Left Tail License Park Lamp Running Lamps M18 15 Amp Blue Right Tail Park Run Lamp M19 B 25 Amp Clear Powertrain M20 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster Interior Light Switch Bank Steering Column Module Switc
383. m h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Modes Of Operation Modes Of Operation With EVIC Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
384. main menu Push and release the UP or DOWN button until System Setup is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC Then push and release the SELECT button to enter the System Setup sub menu Push and release the UP or DOWN button to select a feature form the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three lan guages for all display screens including the trip func tions and the navigation system if equipped Push and release the UP or DOWN button while in this display and es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 scroll through the language choices Push and release the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espanol French Frangais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding you through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist System If Equipped The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only S
385. mission fluid and filter as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 557 Cooling System Highway Driving To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Reduce speed i followi ions heating take the following actions Air Conditionias itv Drivi S Turn off temporarily When stopped for short periods shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground All Models Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Front OK Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK 558 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE When recreationally towing your vehicle always 4 Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly follow follow applicable state and provincial laws Contact state ing the dolly manufacturer s instructions and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details Recreational Towing All Models CAUTION Recreational
386. mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in the Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated When in the Partial Off mode ESC will operate without engine torque manage ment This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 489 traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or mode of operation gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa WARNING tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off ps mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while of ESC except for the limited slip feature de the vehicle is in motion scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be il
387. mote Control NOTE e Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen e Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen The VES will retain the last setting when turned off 1 Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate 2 Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST button on the touch screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the VES Disc button on the touchscreen in the VES column To exit press the back arrow button at the top left of the screen 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg NOTE e To view a Blu ray Disc on the radio push the RADIO MEDIA button on the radio faceplate then press the VES Disc tab button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO button on the touchscreen Viewing a Blu ray Disc on the Touchscreen radio screen is not available in all states provinces If avail able the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with an automatic transmission In vehicles with a manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on the same channel If watching a video on Screen 1 second row then
388. mperature and other factors 051239133 Fuel Economy Mode Switch Six Speed Automatic Transmission When the Fuel Economy ECON Mode is engaged the The transmission gear position display located in the vehicle control systems will change the following instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift Ac e OVE a later P out of PARK Refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter i lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position 466 STARTING AND OPERATING The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 051239136 r Shift Lever Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section for further information Mov ing the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE pos
389. mperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature and clockwise to increase the tempera ture The rear temperature settings are displayed in the front ATC panel When rear controls are locked by the front system the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored Rear Mode Control e Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow e Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451 Win
390. n Always make sure the head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied d 030938797 Stow n Go Seat Folded And Latched Position To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched Raising The Seatback position return the seatback and head restraint to the upright position Then pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 2 Return the head restraint to the upright position Easy Entry Second Row The second row Stow n Go seats allow easy entry to the third row seat or rear cargo area Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat 030938798 Raising The Head Restraint 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward 030938623 Seatback Recliner Lever Seat Tumble And Head Restraint Fold Lever 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The seat will automatically fold into position for easy entry into the third row WARNING In the event of a collision you could be injured if the seat is not fully latched Quad Seats If Equipped Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat Manual Seat Adjuster
391. n both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle 512 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire d
392. n incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction There is a hold open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline To close the sliding door after the hold open latch is activated you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the exterior handle Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched anytime the vehicle is in motion NOTE The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped The power sliding door may be opened or closed manually or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter overhead console switch or rear door switch Pulling the inside or outside power sliding door handle will also power open or close the power sliding door sales NOTE Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a second time while the sliding door is power opening or power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or closed manually 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Push the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door When the door is fully open pushing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the door There are power sliding side door switches located on the B pillar trim panel just
393. n on the RKE transmitter NOTE e For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform ing the following steps Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then push and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button Release both buttons at the same time Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by push ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgat
394. n switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similarly to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON RUN position 020205345 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the lower glove compartment You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylin
395. n until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Blind Spot Alert If Equipped There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert Blind Spot Alert Lights Blind Spot Alert Lights CHM Blind Spot Alert Off The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Alert Lights mode when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Alert Lights CHM mode in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Alert Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification Calib
396. n when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements 640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ses When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately
397. nd you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Push the Phone w button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call push the Voice Command VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold 1 Push the Phone w button until you hear a single beep e This indicates that the call is on hold e To bring the call back from hold push and hold the Phone w button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold push the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on
398. near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 482 STARTING AND OPERATING Se BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still func tion However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness You may notice increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake System Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However the effort required
399. ng as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 485 Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Consult with your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible Traction Control System TCS The Traction Control System TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide en hanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions simi lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinn
400. ng of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power in verter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually push the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Instrument Panel Cupholders The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull out To avoid serious injury or death drawer just above the lower storage bin Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUPHOLDERS There are cupholders located throughout the interior All liners are removable for cleaning Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge for easy removal Refer to Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Cupholders Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops and place the container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 variety of co
401. ngine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629 Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine op
402. njury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never 83 ETHANOL use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements 056502433 If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 E 385 Badge fuel or any mixture of these two fuels Ethanol Fuel E 85 For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom 15 unleaded gasoline mended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 537 When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e You do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be cau
403. nominal charge UNWIRED 410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT ING FROM THE USE OF OR ANY FAILURE OR DE FECT IN THE PRODUCT NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY PU NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction What Will Unwired Do Unwired at its option will repair or replace any defective Product Unwired re serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired wireless headphones please phone 1 888 293 3332 or email customersupport unwiredtechnology com You may register your Unwired wireless headphones online at www unwiredtechnology com or by phone at 1 888 293 3332 System Information Shared Modes This allows the VES
404. normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM e Five Second Unstored Messages When the app
405. not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Apply the parking brake Start the engine Release the clutch pedal if equipped ON oO H CO N Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left ee STARTING AND OPERATING 493 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was com pleted properly the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA
406. ns For Jacking 582 SPECIFICATIONS ioo RR eR RR 573 Jacking Instructions 583 Torque Specifications 00 573 Securing The Compact Spare Tire 590 560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Road Tire Installation 592 W FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 598 B JUMP STARTING 0000 0 594 W SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 599 Preparations For Jump Start 595 Mi TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 601 Jump Starting Procedure 596 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561 IF YOUR ENGI
407. nt of the vehicle and look inside the T het iath 1 center of the hood opening Locate then push the TOES NOU ee area Nene nee safety catch downward while raising the hood at the 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument same time panel below the steering column 031303832 Safety Lever Location Hood Release Lever 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open CAUTION position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious Hood Prop Rod injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel The switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights interior lights and the fog lights Headlight Switch With Halo Control Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switc
408. ntainer types and sizes Press down on the For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the container to engage the cupholder retention features pull out drawer located in the back of the Super Console Super Console If Equipped Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the P HEP cupholders On models equipped with the Super Console there are two cupholders located in the center of the console Rear Cupholders Super Console Cupholders 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i Premium Console Cupholders If Equipped Interior Bottle Holders On models equipped with premium center consoles There are four bottle holders located in the interior One there are four cupholders located on the top of the bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim console panels and one bottle holder is molded into each side sliding interior door trim panel Each holder accommo dates up to a 20 oz 6 L plastic bottle WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury 035135453 Premium Console Cupholders Interior Bottle Holder Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes toys games or MP3 players etc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 Smoker s Package Kit If Equi
409. nterval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage 480 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the
410. ntil the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attach ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint Continued 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is aga
411. ntrol unit located on the instrument panel Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the REAR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear blower control located in the rear overhead console has an off position and a range of blower speeds This allows the second row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control 045635065 Rear Manual Climate Controls system through an intake grille located in the right 4 Rear Blower 3 Rear Mode side trim panel behind the third row seats The 2 Rear Temperature 4 Rear Climate Control Lock heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel Continued E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439 CAUTION Continued just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control The rear mode selection REAR allows the settings to be controlled by the rear mode control knob To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for cold air and clockwise for heated air When rear controls are locked by the front system the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and the rear overhead
412. ny gear except PARK This provides a constant lights on condi tion until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn off Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Fog Lights If Equipped To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob Pressing the headlight switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off Dimmer Controls The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight switch Dimmer Control With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Interior Lighting On Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent extreme top position to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate is opened the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is activated or when the dimmer control is moved t
413. o for your vehicle trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 551 WARNING Continued When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision Continued suspension chassis structure or tires e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the to
414. o hot When the transmission overheat warning light turns on you will experience reduced vehicle perfor mance until the automatic transmission cools down Once the transmission has cooled down and the light turns off you may continue to drive normally If the high speed is maintained the overheating will continue to occur If the overheating continues it may become necessary to stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER ee EVIC IF EQUIPPED Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause tures a driver interactive display that is located in the severe transmission damage or transmission failure instrument cluster WARNING If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi NE 83 F nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in FM 103 5 Fooi Economy gt contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Vehicle Speed 041040005 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 The EVIC Menu items consists of the following The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the stee
415. o not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front s seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and collision and leave you with no protection Inspect pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re around your lap placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Positioning The Lap Belt 4 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collis
416. o not open the hood until the radiator has had Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent used time to cool Never try to open a cooling system with water as directed on the container aids cleaning pressure cap when the radiator is hot action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625 Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 only by an authorized dealer Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS
417. o the extreme top The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every activation thereafter until the engine is started if one of the following occur e A door sliding door or the liftgate is left open e Any overhead reading light is left on NOTE The ignition must be cycled to the OFF position for this feature to operate Interior Lighting Off Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position extreme bottom The interior lights will remain off when the doors or liftgate are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent This feature brightens the odometer radio and overhead displays when the parking lights or headlights are on 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Halo Lights If Equipped Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in locating specific features while driving at night The Halo control switch is located to the right of the dimmer switch 0314043828 Halo Control To activate the Halo lights rotate the Halo S switch control upward or downward to in crease or decrease the lighting Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 The multifunction lever cont
418. oads which extend over the windshield such Cargo must be securely tied before driving your as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby SUN SCREENS IF EQUIPPED truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may Sun screens are available for second and third row result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle seating windows The screens store in the sill trim panels and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack 302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 036405280 Sun Screen Retracted Sun Screen Extended Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen To lower the sun screen gently lift the tab upward to Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the disengage the hooks and feed the screen back into the top of the window base sill Once the screen is completely to the top of the window extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top
419. of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading doe
420. of personal For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro for further warranty information carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621 The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that
421. of the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 307 EVIC Red Telltale Lights 331 E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 308 Oil Change Required ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 309 Fuel Economy vc 22 ose kem e ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 310 VehicleSpeed os nod IV MS 337 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER TripInf i e e emma 337 IDEE SEES IEEE icto nte ea is jy PC Prrrpr EIE 338 PE see nee Pn ee Cus rosis Rope ates adress ted 338 EVIC White Telltale Lights 330 Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 338 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights o 0 aai RT M dee eee tie d Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped 339 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Compass Temperature Display 340 Turn Menu Off ios cem eR er wears 342 Customer Programmable Features System Set p eme ev 342 ll Uconnect amp 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED pete diite eek ERIS 349 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipp d 2 0 26 se 349 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped as acer RR S SOROR een Rs 349 B Uconnect 130 osse ese e gas 350 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 350 Operation Instructions CD MO
422. ole are two courtesy lights standard dome light has two buttons The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry Sunglass Storage Non Sunroof Only RKE the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK At the front of the overhead console a compartment is button on the RKE transmitter is pressed P provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press a second time to turn each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows LED lamps only From the closed position press the door latch to open the compartment The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console pre mium console only This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down 033336477 Over Door Latch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 033336480 033336478 Conversation Mirror Position Full Open Position NOTE From the conversation mirror position the From this position the door can be fully closed or by door can only be closed rotating upward about 3 4 o
423. olli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts pretensioners and Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Your
424. omeLink system To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink
425. oners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Automatic Locking Retractor ALR If Equipped The seat belts in the rear passenger seating positions may be equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating posi tion 0226002258 Second Row Captains Chair 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es o o ALR 5 a CINCH ah o je 0226002260 Second Row Bench e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor e Cinch Cinching Latch Plate If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s midsection so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you
426. ong as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important to regularly check and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver Module e Four TPMS Sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and graphics displaying tire pressures e TPMS Telltale Warning Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 527 TPMS Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing An Inflate Tire to XX message will also be displayed Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is
427. ons NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially b OFF off Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 swaying trailer is recognized Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in this sec tion for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is di
428. oor will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flashers With Sliding Door When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate when power or manual sliding doors are in operation signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or entering the vehicle To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry
429. option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it Push the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect
430. or to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 4 7 Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any dire
431. ormal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle 612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Maintenance Schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your
432. osition next to a child seat using the LATCH anchor ages in an outboard position 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Child Restraint LATCH Positions Can the rear facing child restraint touch Yes the back of the front passenger seat The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and fixed quad seats are removable 2nd row stow n go head restraints are not remov able The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 Locating the LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion 022638609 LATCH Anchorages Third Row 60 40 Anchorages Shown Locating The Tether Anchorages 4 There are tether strap anchors located behind J each rear seatback near the floor LATCH Anchorages Second Row Anchorages Shown 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 7 Tether Strap Anchorages Third Row 60 40 Anchorage S
433. other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions 13 Panel Mode Button Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired push the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem perature Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes Max A C For maximum cooling use the A C and Recirculation mode buttons at the same time Rear Manual Climate Control If Equipped The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets 438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear Rear Blower Control seat passengers are located in the headliner near the The primary control for the rear blower is on the front center of the vehicle P y climate co
434. ound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information Auto Lock Doors When selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until a check mark appears Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx opened To make your selection push and release the Right arrow button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK but ton When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press you must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On ist Press is selected all of the door
435. ound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply push the Phone amp e button and follow the audible prompts for direc tions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the Phone w button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Pair
436. outlets at the rear of the of these outlets can be individually adjusted to right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets outboard rear seating position The system provides to one side will shut off the airflow heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the headliner outlets 448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC panel located on the instrument panel Pushing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front ATC panel Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off The rear ATC system is located in the headliner near the 045635064 center of th vehicle Rear ATC Control Features 1 Blower Speed 3 Rear Mode 2 Rear Temperature 4 Rear Temperature Lock E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449 1 Push the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC
437. oval position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF position NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Fuel Economy ECON Mode The Fuel Economy ECON mode can improve the vehi cle s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi tions Press the econ switch in the center stack of the instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECON mode is engaged STARTING AND OPERATING 465 e The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to allow the engine to operate at lower speeds e The torque converter clutch may engage at lower engine speeds and remain on longer The engine idle speed will be lower The overall driving performance will be more conser vative Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily 5 inhibited based on te
438. ove Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile the damaged parts of the device before further use traction device or equivalent is recommended e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km WARNING Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Using tires of different size and type M S Snow Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Continued 520 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as thos
439. ove disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Using The RKE Transmitter Three button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN LOCK LOCK and PANIC functions E 020207434 Key Fob With Three Button RKE Transmitter Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle Vehicles built without the powered options will be 020207434 equipped E nd n Bind RKE a Fa Key Fob With Three Button RKE Transmitter m an wer n A rakes ose ouit WIES power et Geven button RKE transmitters will provide functions i ith z RKE i Equniper witi Up wy SSVERSDHMON ener that allow the same basic operation as the three button but may also be used to operate the power liftgate 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se optional power sliding doors Remote Start feature optional Some features can be programmed to the customers preferences For example lights flash or sound horn on lock 020207433 Key Fob With Seven Button RKE Transmitter Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s side or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate This will also turn on the Illuminated Entry system Remote Key Unlock On First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s side or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK butto
440. ovides the Source Code As Is and without warranty of any kind By downloading Source Code you expressly assume all risk and liability associ ated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code e THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORIFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PER SONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CON SUMER TO i ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD AVC VIDEO AND OR ii DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PER SONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PRO VIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L L C SEE HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427 e THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC 1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PER SONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CON SUMER TO i ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC 1 STANDARD VC 1 VIDEO AND OR ii DECODE VC 1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PER SONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PRO VIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC 1 VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L L C SEE HTTP WWW
441. oving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 124 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
442. ows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Push the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NO
443. p and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Continued A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing inter nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued WARNING Continued A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli sion A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you d
444. per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability STARTING AND OPERATING 539 ADDING FUEL NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the fuel door left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap A poorly fitting cap could let Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap impurities into the fuel system and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 056810708 Fuel Filler Cap 540 STARTING AND OPERATING S
445. perations coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel When the front control is in any position other than rear the front control operates all the rear functions The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera tion Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the front control is in the Panel mode When the front unit is in Bi Level mode airflow will be emitted from both the upper and lower rear outlets When the front control is in Floor Defrost or Mix modes airflow will be directed out of the rear floor outlets 8 045634481 Manual Temperature Control UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433 1 Left Front Temperature Control Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem perature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 2 Rear Blower Control If Equipped Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the rear system in any mode you select The rear blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are seven blower speeds To allow the rear overhead control turn blower knob fully to the left past The O off position into the REAR control position 3 Front Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The b
446. play Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
447. port the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags e Supplemental Active Head Restraints e Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 2 If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt be
448. power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors e The park lights will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a Remote Start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the transmitter After the vehicle is unlocked you can enter the vehicle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON RUN position otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle The message Remote Start Active Key To Run will display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON RUN po
449. pped With the optional authorized dealer installed Smoker s Package Kit a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel To install the ash receiver align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and or storage The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom modate a second ash receiver if desired 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Upper Glove Compartment Glove Compartments To open the upper compartment press in on the button located on the left side of the upper door The door will l Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the automatically open passenger side of the instrument panel a 035235303 E Upper Compartment To close the compartment door push downward on the door s surface to latch the door closed Upper And Lower Glove Compartments ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 Lower Glove Compartment NOTE The lower compartment is equipped with a lock To open the lower compartment pull out on the release a paste eee d handle Door Trim Panel Storage Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for Bae storage Lower Compartment 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped Umbr
450. psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 509 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radi
451. purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603 The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed un equipment is not available and the transmission is e Towing faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four 15 mi 24 km with front wheels on the ground can wheels on the ground under the following conditions cause severe transmission damage Damage from The aransmis
452. r The recommended tongue weight is 10 to 15 for a conventional hitch You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 546 STARTING AND OPERATING es Weight Distributing Hitch WARNING A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride o
453. r the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect amp phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting A Different Audio Device 1 Push the Phone w button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and following the beep say Setup then say Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list the audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or push the VR vR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or push the VR vr but ton on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info Uconnect MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED Your rear seat Video Entertainment System VES is designed to give your family years of enjoyment You can play your favorite CDs or DVDs listen to audio over the wireless headphones or plug and play a variety of standard video games or audio devices Please review this Owner s Manual to become familiar with its features and operation UNDERSTANDING
454. raps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 2 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat 3 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt WARNING When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat b
455. rarily move the shift lever m WARNING 1 Turn the engine OFF Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener 2 Firmly apply the parking brake ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Continued 600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal shift lever override access cover located near the top 5 right of the shift lever in the instrument panel Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole and push and hold the override release lever forward 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover 061537003 j Shift Lever Override Access Cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601 Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable Wheel lift Rear e Transmission in NEUTRAL e 25 mph 40 km h max speed e 15 miles 24 km max distance Front OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD 602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this
456. rate Compass Press the RIGHT arrow button to calibrate the compass Compass Variance Refer to Compass Temperature Display in Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for more information Uconnect 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for de tailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect 130 042305232 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch
457. re the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 4 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses 566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567 WARNING Continued e Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
458. recautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Donoss7 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i
459. reeze is not recommended ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en ine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine nadine Cooler coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine system in an emergency the cooling system will coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh lows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exc
460. remote control s ENTER OK button to accept the change DVD Player Level Menu To set the rating activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425 Using the remote control s Left and Right cursor buttons select the Rating tab Highlight Change Rating and then push the remote control s ENTER OK button Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then push the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits After the four digit password is entered push the remote control s ENTER OK button If the password is correct the Rating Level menu is displayed Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons select the new rating level and then push the remote control s ENTER OK button to accept the change 426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Product Agreement Software This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License GPL or GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL etc You have the right of acqui sition modification and distribution of the source code of the GPL LGPL software You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge http www embedded carmultimedia jp linux oss download MP 632 34W821 The website pr
461. remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 third row gt Push to navigate menus SETUP Push to access the Blu ray Setup menu screen When a disc is loaded in the Blu ray player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403 if equipped and the VES mode is selected and the disc is stopped push the SETUP button to access the Blu ray Setup menu gt Push and release to jump to the next available audio track or video chapter Push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter gt Play Pause Begin resume or pause disc play Four Colored Buttons Push to access Blu ray Disc features 10 POPUP MENU Push to access the Blu ray main menu when in Blu ray or DVD mode Push to start Scan or start Random track functions in CD or HDD modes 11 KEYPAD Push to navigate chapters or titles 12 Stop Stops disc play 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 13 1 4 Push and release to jump to the previous audio track or video chapter Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter 14 Mutes headphone audio 15 BACK Push to exit out of menus or return to source selection screen 16 V Push to navigate menus 17 OK Push to select the highlighted option in a menu 18 4 Push to navigate menus 19 A Push to navigate menus Remote Control Storage The video screen s
462. rence caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent colli sions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Continued 484 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni f3 tors the anti lock brake system The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as lo
463. ring Fuel Economy wheel e Vehicle Speed e Trip Info e Tire PSI Vehicle Info Messages e Units System Setup Personal Settings e Turn Menu Off 040941860 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e LIP Button A Push and release the UP button to scroll up ward through the main menu items Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Mes sages Units System Setup e DOWN Button Push and release the DOWN button to scroll V downward through the main menu items e RIGHT Button The RIGHT SELECT button allows access to gt information in EVIC submenus selects some feature settings and resets some EVIC features The EVIC prompts the driver when the RIGHT button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic Once the RIGHT button has been selected for the desired submenu list follow the EVIC prompts to properly select the desired sub menu EVIC features e BACK Button Push and release the BACK button to scroll BACK back toa previous menu or sub menu gt Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 3 The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom eter line The main display area will
464. rked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Reset To Reset all settings using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone w button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book en tries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command For best performance e Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under Low to medium blower setting Low to medium vehicle speed e Low road noise e Smooth road surface Fully closed windows Dry weather condition 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when
465. rn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Park Assist Disabled Service Park Assist System Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Blind Spot System Off This message is displayed when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Spot System has been turned off Blind Spot System Not Available This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block age electronic interference or other temporary con ditions When this message is displayed both outside 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL rear view icons will be illuminated If electronic inter ference is present the BSM system will illuminate the icon only on the side of interference as long as inter ference is present e Service Blind Spot System This message is dis played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is permanently unavailable The driver will receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated If this message is present see an authorized dealer EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Electronic Range Select ERS Status The shift lever status 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged
466. rols the Turn Signals Headlight Beams Low High e Flash To Pass e Front and Rear Wipers Washer Functions Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph 29 km h for about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert the driver Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch When the headlights are turned on pushing the multi function lever toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams to high beams Pulling back to the neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam operation Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Battery Pro
467. ropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Key in ignition e Ignition or Accessory On Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted L Gate ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote start active Push Start Button Remote start active Key to Run Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed Vehicle Not in Park Key Left Vehicle Key Not Detected Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 e e Liftgate Ajar chime will sound when vehicle starts moving Low Tire Pressure Service TPM System refer to Tire Pressure Monitor ing System in Starting And Operating Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to XX Turn Signal On RKE Battery Low Service Keyless System Low Washer Fluid Oil Change Required Check Gascap Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Right Front Tu
468. rs If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signal off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 5 High Beam Indicator Z This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever for ward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 6 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Odometer Display Trip Odometer Display The odom eter display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jam
469. rted in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause Continued CAUTION Continued severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 ERS Operation in this section for further information to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower g
470. s This light will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar a This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM e Oil Pressure Warning Light TH This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light yA This light informs you
471. s 2 channel audio output only Audio Compact Discs CDs CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio format files e Video CDs MPEG 1 video compression 416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The Blu Ray Player is capable of the playing the following types of discs 12 cm diameter e BD BDMV Profile 1 1 BDAV e DVD DVD Video DVD Audio AVCREC AVCHD DVD VR e CD CD DA VCD CD TEXT e DVD CD MP3 WMA AAC DivX versions 3 6 profile 3 0 Compressed Video Files DivX The Blu Ray Player is capable of playing DivX files from a CD disc usually a CD R CD RW or a DVD disc usually a DVD R DVD R DVD RW or DVD RW The Blu Ray Player always uses the file extension to determine the video format so DivX files must always e end with the extension div divx or avi To prevent incorrect playback do not use these extensions for any other types of files For DivX files only DivX Home Theater Profile Ver 3 0 is supported Any file that is copy protected will not play The Blu Ray Player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file Other compression formats such as Xvid and RMP4 will not play The Blu Ray Player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file For the lack of indexes DivX files Resume Play Fast Forward and Fast Rewind cannot be sup ported es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
472. s SCAN RANDOM for a CD gt Play Pause Begin resume or pause disc play Stop Stops disc play en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401 10 PROG Up Down Rewind skip back and fast fwd 14 MODE SOURCE Push to change the mode of the 11 12 13 skip forward When listening to a radio mode pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and push ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the radio When listening to compressed audio on a data disc PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG Down selects the previous directory When listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple disc changer PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previous disc MUTE Push to mute the headphone audio output for the selected channel SLOW If Equipped Push to slow playback of a DVD disc Push play amp to resume normal play STATUS If Equipped Push to display the current status 15 16 selected channel See the Mode Selection section of this manual for details on changing modes SETUP When in a video mode push the SETUP button to access the display settings see the display settings section to access the DVD setup menu select the menu button on the radio When a disc is loaded in the DVD player if equipped and the VES mode is selected and the disc is stopped push the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup menu see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual BACK When na
473. s e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi mately 4 F 20 C WARNING This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood service Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563 Tire Service Kit Storage 1 Open the liftgate The Tire Service Kit is stowed behind the rear left side 2 Tum the two rear left side trim panel latches to release trim panel in the rear cargo area the trim panel Tire Service Kit Location Tire Service Kit 564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tire Service Kit Components And Operation O20 a Tire Service Kit Components 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button 5 Mode Select Knob 6 Sealant Hose Clear 7 Air Pump Hose Black 8 Power Plug located on the bot tom side of the Tire Service Kit Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting thi
474. s capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 inch 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION Continued Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Continued other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting A CD y Push the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejec
475. s mode Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position to inject the Tire v Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the Tire Service Kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Using The Deflation Button Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions e Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565 0604018634 mm Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make su
476. s not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME WARNING If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will display in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display eac
477. s on the third row With the Quad seat in the fold flat position the seat cushion lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of the seat and lift the seat forward Fold Flat Quad Seat Easy Entry Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 For passengers seated in the third row there is a pull Removal strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of the seat back Third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the seatback and accessing the easy entry lever The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is needed With the seat in the easy entry position push the cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor latches 030935664 Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers Cross Beam For Seat Removal 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies near the floor To remove the seat squeeze each release handle and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels A lock indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its Easy Out Rollers While the bench seat does not stow in the floor it is removable for added cargo space 030936464 Second Row Bench Seat 030905893 Release Handles ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 To reinstall the seat align the sea
478. s prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline CAUTION Materials Added To Fuel Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s All gasoline sold in the United States is required to Performance u contain effective detergent additives Use of additional The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law detergents or other additives is not needed under normal Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor conditions and they would result in additional cost mance and damage the EMISSIONS control system Therefore you should not have to add anything to the An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition fuel malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 534 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhal
479. s the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HIGH to LOW indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automati cally after approximately 45 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the second row seats are equipped with heaters There are two heated seat switches that allow the second row passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side door handle trim panels 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Second Row Heated Seat Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operat
480. s to that for the mobile phone directly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 NOTE You should program the desired Towing Assis tance phone number using the Voice Command system To do this push the Phone button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance When prompted say 1 800 521 2779 for U S Canada say 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can push the Voice Command vr button and say the sequ
481. s will unlock on the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated RKE Linked To Memory If Equipped When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pushed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is cycled to ON RUN position To make your selection push and release the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 RIGHT arrow button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Lock When this
482. sabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill 492 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will
483. sed by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 538 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg Kilometers
484. sed head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Ma
485. side your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service i
486. sition Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Cancel Remote Start Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm e Any engine warning lights come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pushed The shift lever is moved out of PARK The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle e The brake pedal is pushed To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start Mode Push and release the REMOTE START button 1 time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the Remote Start Mode the system will not allow the Remote Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request When To Reset Remote Start The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the Remote Starting sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start ing After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Security Alarm system is alarming or if the PANIC button was pushed the vehicle must be reset Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position es THINGS TO K
487. so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instruc tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint e www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK 732 8243 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child
488. spare tire cover assembly 8 Assembled T handle A Spare Tire Hook T handle B Extension 1 C Extension 2 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579 580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Removal Instructions The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the center console area 060640532 Assembling The Spare Tire Hook A Spare Tire Hook T handle B Extension 1 C Extension 2 Spare Tire And Cover 1 Assemble the spare tire tools into a T handle and place the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581 2 Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 060541476 mm Pulling Spare Tire NOTE If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle 3 To remove the compact spare tire cover assembly assemble the winch T handle extensions to form a spare tire hook and pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle 582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Stand the tire cover assembly upright and remove the Preparations For Jacking wheel spacer by sque
489. ss will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings AX 6 y 7V8XV9 Compass Variance Map 040506040 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number dis plays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the RETURN button to exit Turn Menu Off Push and release RIGHT arrow button to turn the menu off Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select System Setup from the
490. stems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is prop
491. supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfac tion HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual qm im i 1 1 L la j de lo A D ib i E i E eile io q iS ie js TIE E ELECTRONNC ALLWMEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK s CONTI m amp lala la jo I uer if INTRODUCTION 5 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS aga
492. t into the detent posi tions on the floor Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward until the lock indicator button returns into the handle WARNING If not properly latched the bench seats could become loose Personal injuries could result After reinstall ing these seats be sure the red indicator button on the release handles return into the handles Third Row Power Recline If Equipped The power recline feature located on the side of the seat cushion adjusts the seatback angle forward rearward for occupant comfort UN we Third Row Power Seat Switch 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Third Row Power Folding Seat If Equipped A one touch power folding seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank NOTE Lower the head restraint by pulling on the release strap marked 1 located on the outboard side of the head restraint 030938618 Head Restraint Release Strap 1 The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is in PARK UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 One Touch Folding Seat Third Row The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or together The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel R
493. t this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611 before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for n
494. tains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Care Instrument Panel Surfaces The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPARO Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care shou
495. tch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431 CD DVD Blu ray Disc MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD Blu ray Disc in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or el
496. te rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a co
497. tection This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights parking lights or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position After eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the eight minute delay UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS NOTE Always remove any buildup of snow that pre The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within vents ihe ae pue on ai du ihe the multifunction lever Rotate the end of the multifunc Position If the windshield wiper switch is turned oft tion lever to select the desired wiper speed and the blades cannot return to the off position damage a to the wiper motor may occur WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Washer And Wiper Controls 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
498. ted a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 SEEK Button Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Push and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Push this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Push the SET RND button a second time to stop Random Pl
499. teer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added ee STARTING AND OPERATING 543 Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separ
500. ter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Before you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting on high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Window Fogging A C Air Filter Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy The climate control system filters out dust and pollen and or humid weather To clear the windows select from the air Refer to Air Conditioning in Maintaining Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow
501. ter cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information 632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may Continued WARNING Continued cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision
502. tery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING Continued The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk
503. th the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 468 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the Key Fob When the ignition is in the LOCK OFF key re moval position the transmission is locked in Continued WARNING Continued PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brak
504. the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pushing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Push and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message to step through the remaining stored messages Pushing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pushed to change ignition switch position current ignition status will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC display to the right of the odometer value Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Oper ating for more information 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display eight or fifteen compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic until it is calibr
505. the brakes before shifting from asa bulb check when the ignition switch is first PARK turned to ON RUN If the light is either noton e The highest available transmission gear is displayed o during starting stays on or turns on while in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle driving have the system inspected at an authorized Information Center EVIC whenever the Flectronic dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints Range Select ERS feature is active Use the in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operat 16 Shift Lever Indicator ing for further information The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi a FANSTISSION e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 18 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE I
506. the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraints Front Seats 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint LB oan Push Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position LII 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
507. the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter refer to Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory in this section Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the RKE Linked To Memory feature through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position 2 Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2 NOTE If a memory profile has not already been set refer to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 4 Press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster 5 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by press
508. ticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571 D Drive Vehicle E After Driving Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire Pullover to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position WARNING 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the s vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and using Tire Service Kit Do not exceed 55 mph 90 screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to stem follow this warning can result in injuries that are 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure serious or fatal to you your passengers and others Gauge 3 around you If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance 572 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES M If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on Tire
509. tion pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels 518 STARTING AND OPERATING Se It is recommended you contact your authorized tire WARNING Continued dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure approved for your vehicle to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect Never use a tire with a smaller load index or the safety handling and ride of your vehicle capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a
510. tiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section for further information Dial By Saying A Number To dial a number using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect amp Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name To call a specific name using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone w button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone
511. tm mm Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions 430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume Pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pushing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM or to CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch op eration in each mode Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset push button CD Player Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pushing the bottom of the swi
512. to output radio sources to the headphones and the radio to output VES sources to the vehicle speakers When the radio and VES channel 1 or 2 are in the same shared mode a VES icon will be ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411 visible on the radio s display for that channel and the shared icon will be visible on the VES screen When in shared mode the same audio source is heard in the shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2 If the radio functions FM AM or SAT are in the shared mode with the VES only the radio is able to control the radio functions In this case VES can share the radio mode but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to a mode that is different from the VES selected radio mode When shared the radio has priority over the VES or all radio modes FM AM and SAT The VES has the ability to switch tuner AM FM SEEK SCAN TUNE and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES have control of the video functions The VES has the ability to control the following video modes 1 CD Ability to Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down 2 CD Changer in radio Ability to Disk Up Down and program all listed CD controls Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down The VES can even control radio modes or video modes while the radio is turned off The VES can access the rad
513. to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome OFF position rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far left detent position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate and activate the Panic Alarm optional power liftgate left power sliding door and right power sliding door from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button pushes from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and ab
514. tom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 517 tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire infla
515. tor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595 Preparations For Jump Start WARNING The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 28060836475 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK Positive Battery Post 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EM 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the ee parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables could establish a ground connection and personal injury could resu
516. towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow 5 Release the parking brake drivetrain will result If this vehicle requires tow ing make sure the drive wheels are OFF the this procedure ground 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re the dolly manufacturer s instructions quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un 2 Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 3 Firmly apply the parking brake Place the transmis sion in PARK WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 561 W JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF OP VOURENGNEOVEREBATS gcc an gi BOUIPPED inatin caren aul 575 lI TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED 562 Jack Location e cie pre Be eR s 576 Tire Service Kit Storage lesse 563 SRI THO RSEN e epee ea To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut Tire Service Kit Components And Operation 564 Spare Tire Tools llle Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 565 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 567 Span TIE Removal IGGHUCH UUS ricus en tea 560 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Preparatio
517. tton for warmer temperatures or the lower button for cooler temperature settings 11 Rear Control Button Provides toggle operation between front control screen and rear control screen Push the button to activate the rear climate control screen and allow the front seat occupants control over the rear climate settings 12 Rear Window Defrost Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes 13 Rear Lock Push and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls 14 Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Push and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443 15 Climate Control OFF Button Push and release to turn the Climate Control OFF If the control is OFF push any button to turn the control ON 16 Blower Control There are seven blower speeds the blower speed in creases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into man
518. ual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors llle 131 Overhead Console ss ne RR teen 253 Overhead Travel Information Center 253 Overheating Engine carea ea ae a y de ha 321 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 Paint Care pena oe d Rer ended PO Ea ad 634 Panic Alarms iede eer ERROR Ae OR ER Cen 25 Parking Brakec cec bem eedem e dos 479 ParkSense System Rear eco ccecce nanana 241 Personal Settings re sco d mis dse o Ue EE REI S 342 Pets Transporting sses enid sasi seeti ii een 119 Placard Tire and Loading Information 502 Power Brakes 4 edes oa eR oe Ree se Sa od 482 Door Locks 2 0 0 000 eee ee 37 Litt Gate a mer SCREENS Oh AER ee 53 MiIffOIS zik dk Re ERG eS Gas RACER 133 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 270 S6alS 2 be bees RE RE ERIO EuG PR wee ees 184 Sliding DOOR ss keset ace ee ec n es 45 DICCIING uci o rE sakia a ee acd a o ceca 478 DUFIFOOE cancri Cat ples marge id E indus 266 a INDEX 693 WindOWs o iacaa aye OCS eae PSone Eh wd 40 Power Steering Fud iius eee Rm a 659 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 72 Preparation for Jacking 005 582 Pretensioners Seat Belts oce cus gis bine Bhi ete es Pars ek es 72 Programmable Electronic Features 342 Radial Ply Tires i um ee RR oS are ee es 509 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 628 Radio Operation s ee srs tanana dats 4
519. ual mode 17 Mode Control Button Push and release to select between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 18 Recirculation Control Button Push and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 19 SYNC Button Push and release to control the temperature setting for all three zones from the driver temperature control 20 Driver Temperature Control UplDown Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the lower button for cooler temperature settings Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system 444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows If not operating in AUTO mode the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield DEFROST mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass If fog or mist appears on the windshield or sid
520. uality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ses WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deterior
521. ument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold tire placard pressure value located on the placard label on the driver s side B Pillar The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 525 The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this infor mation The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios e Jamming
522. urt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 6 Install the compact spare tire Lightly tighten the lug nuts 060633619 CAUTION Mounting Compact Spare Tire Be sure to mount the compact spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the compact spare tire is mounted incor rectly a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589 WARNING WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately NOTE Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare 10 Place the deflated flat tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the compact spare tire location 8 Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for Have the full sized tire repaired or replaced as soon mm proper wheel lug nut torque as possible 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to th
523. use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Push this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Uconnect 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 042340030 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUM
524. ust be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668731 Second Row Bench e V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e Zi Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 022668730 Second Row Captains Chairs es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 Child Restraint LATCH Positions What is the weight limit child s weight 4 weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to in stall a child seat in the center p
525. vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags 1 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs Located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 022636494 Front Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the out board side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 2 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Located above the side windows The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG
526. ves in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided Your authorized dealer can check your trans mission fluid level using a special service dipstick If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans mission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
527. view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 OVERHEAD CONSOLES Front Overhead Console Two versions of the overhead console are available The base front overhead console model featured fixed incan descent courtesy reading lights flip down sunglass stor age and conversation mirror The premium front over head console model features a LED focused light that illuminates the instrument panel cupholders two swiv eling LED lights flip down sunglass storage conversa tion mirror optional power sliding door switches and an optional power liftgate switch NOTE Premium sunroof console models include all of above except sunglass storage 033335293 Overhead Console Courtesy Interior Lighting At the forward end of the cons
528. vigating in menu mode push to return to the previous screen When navigating a DVDs disc menu the operation depends on the disc s contents 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 17 4 In radio modes push to seek to the previous 18 19 tunable station In disc modes push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu ENTER OK Push to select the highlighted option in a menu A NEXT In radio modes push to select to the next station In disc modes push to advance to the next audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu Blu ray Player Remote Control If Equipped 044874416 Blu ray Player Remote Control Controls And Indicators 1 Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off To hear audio while the screen is closed push the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pushed the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily 3 SOURCE Push to enter Source Selection screen Channel Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan nel 1 second row When the selector switch is in the Rear 2 position the
529. w vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels Continued 552 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to GCWR must not be exceeded Tires General Information in Starting And Oper Total weight must be distributed between the tow ating for proper tire inflation procedures vehicle and the trailer such that the following four i f ratings are not exceeded e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 1 GVWR e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage AGEN before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 3 GAWR Information in Starting And Operating for the proper inspection procedure 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting And Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact higher load carrying capacity will not increase the spare tire vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 553 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes WARNING Do not interconnect the hydraulic
530. when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle HLIDIDEITIUC LAETI Wi SU Db iect Detected 032839250 ParkSense
531. will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 523 CAUTION NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Us ing aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to be come inoperable After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized service center to have your sensor function checked After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPMS sensor and maintenance or to prov
532. win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning blower is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu push the Voice Com mand VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands and Local commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command e vRbutton 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command amp vRbutton You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio AM to switch to the radio AM mode e Radio FM to switch to radio FM mode e Sat to switch to Satellite radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e e USB to switch to USB mode Bluetooth Streaming
533. wing commands e e Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu USB Mode To switch to USB mode say USB In this mode you may say the following commands Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Play to play an Artist Name Playlist Name Album Name Track Name etc Bluetooth Streaming BT Mode To switch to Bluetooth Streaming BT mode say Bluetooth Streaming In this mode you may say the following commands Play to play the current track e Pause to pause the current track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Memo Mode To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may push the Voice Command EVR button to stop recording You proceed by say ing one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may push the Voice Com mand amp VR button to stop playing memos You pro ceed by saying one of the following comman
534. wing occurs e The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding e The mirrors are accidentally manually folded unfolded The mirrors come out of the unfolded position The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds 0314040201 Power Folding Mirror Switch 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To reset the power folding mirrors Fold and unfold them by pressing the button This may require multiple button pushes This resets them to their normal position Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights 030405283 Illuminated Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle 0304052885 Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transmission Vehicles
535. with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions STARTING AND OPERATING 549 Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 550 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements ele on ne tear axle arte velicle To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive The tongue weight of the trailer train components the following guidelines are recom The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended put in or on your vehicle CAUTION The weight of the driver and all passengers Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 2 Van she ee a gt ce E 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additiona or other parts could be damaged factory installed options or dealer installed options must Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and carg
536. with gaso line containing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following Drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer Change the engine oil and oil filter Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump ee STARTING AND OPERATING 533 therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Fuel System Cautions the gasoline contains MMT MMT i
537. worn the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The pretensi
538. x ceeds 140 F 60 C When this occurs the DVD Blu ray Player will display High Temp and will shut off the display until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD Blu ray Player The Blu ray player may require additional reading time during extremely cold weather conditions When this occurs allow the vehicles interior temperature to warm then insert disc into player UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421 Display All of the Language settings have a special Other settin He i 8 d i 8 to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng Other L Set BUag P 8 eee ee lish These languages are selected using a special four digit code To enter a new language code activate the DVD Setup Menu To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD enter Menu Language Japanese radio disc mode then DVD setup and follow these English additional instructions POther Mrxxea Audio Language Japanese e Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but English 4 tons highlight the Language item you want to edit Other xxx and then push the remote control ENTER OK button PES a M Sub Title P Japanese 4 Using the remote control Down cursor button select Language Engl ish Other xxx the Other setting then push the remote control s Right cursor button to begin editing the setting Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but tons select a digit for the current position
539. y to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers A 110 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet converts DC current vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the to AC current and is located on the left rear trim panel battery even more quickly Only use these intermit immediately behind the second row left passenger seat tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage Continued 035035445 Power Inverter Outlet The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls To turn on the power outlet push the switch once Push the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion 3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rati
540. yed Tire PSI Push and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI displays highlighted in the EVIC Push and release the SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic Units Push and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then push and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Push and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC Then push and release the SELECT button Push and release the UP and DOWN ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 button to scroll through the available information dis plays then push and release SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temp Displays the actual oil temperature Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trailer Brake If Equipped Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake status indicator e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Messages Select from Main Menu using
541. your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the mas

2015 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents